WO2020200261A1 - Connecting method and apparatus, network device, and storage medium - Google Patents

Connecting method and apparatus, network device, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020200261A1
WO2020200261A1 PCT/CN2020/082888 CN2020082888W WO2020200261A1 WO 2020200261 A1 WO2020200261 A1 WO 2020200261A1 CN 2020082888 W CN2020082888 W CN 2020082888W WO 2020200261 A1 WO2020200261 A1 WO 2020200261A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
message
secondary base
information
target
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/082888
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杨立
马子江
方建民
黄河
Original Assignee
中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 中兴通讯股份有限公司 filed Critical 中兴通讯股份有限公司
Publication of WO2020200261A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020200261A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/30Connection release

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communications, such as connection methods, devices, network equipment, and storage media.
  • the third generation partnership project (3rd Generation Partnership Project, 3GPP) fourth generation land-based (4Generation, 4G) cellular mobile communication system or LTE (Long Term Evolution) cellular mobile communication system includes: 4G core network EPC (Evolved Packet Core, evolved packet core network) and RAN (Radio Access Network, radio access network).
  • 4G EPC includes: MME (Mobility Management Entity, mobility management entity node), SGW (Serving Gateway, Serving Gateway node), PGW (PDN Gateway, PDN gateway node) and other basic network element nodes.
  • 4G RAN includes: eNB (evolved Node B, long-term evolution base station) and the interface between many base stations.
  • the fifth-generation land-based 5G cellular mobile communication system after 4G includes 5GC (5Generation Core, fifth-generation core network) and NG-RAN (Next Generation Radio Access Network, next-generation radio access network).
  • 5GC includes: AMF (Access Mobility Function, access mobility function) node, SMF (Session Management Function, session management function) node, UPF (User Plane Function, user plane function) node and other network element nodes.
  • NG-RAN includes at least two different RAT (Radio Access Technology) base stations, namely: ng-eNB based on 4G eNB continuous enhancement and evolution, and gNB base station designed with a new physical layer air interface.
  • NG-RAN also includes interfaces between base stations and related network element entities.
  • the ng-eNB air interface still supports the E-UTRA (evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access, evolved universal terrestrial radio access) RAT standard
  • the gNB air interface supports the NR (New Radio, new radio) RAT standard.
  • the UE When the UE is connected to multiple base stations of the access network at the same time for data transmission, it is necessary to rely on the interface between the primary base station and the core network and the Xn interface between the primary and secondary base stations to exchange information related to various dual-multiple connection operations.
  • the connection of the Xn interface is not fixed and the robustness is relatively low, which may easily cause multiple connections to be unstable or unable to be configured and operated.
  • connection method including:
  • connection method including:
  • first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the specified operation includes Connection establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release;
  • connection device including:
  • the first sending module is configured to send a first indication message to the target secondary base station, where the first indication message includes first indication information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and Specified operations include creation, addition, modification or deletion;
  • the first receiving module is configured to receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
  • connection device including:
  • the fifth receiving module is configured to receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and Specified operations include creation, addition, modification or deletion;
  • An execution module configured to execute the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal;
  • the fifth sending module is configured to send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a network device, the network device includes: a processor and a memory;
  • the memory is used to store instructions
  • the processor is configured to read the instruction to execute the method described in any one of the embodiments of the present application.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a storage medium that stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the method described in any one of the embodiments of the present application is implemented.
  • the embodiments of the present application can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, which is beneficial to improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
  • Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of an aggregated NG-RAN base station
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of heterogeneous networks deployed in macro and micro cells with different RAT standards
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the MN mastering the UE dual connection operation
  • 4a and 4b are schematic diagrams of the UE in dual connection mode
  • Figures 5a and 5b are schematic diagrams of changes in the coverage of a satellite base station serving cell
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the establishment and maintenance of the feeder link of the satellite base station
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 13 is an architecture diagram of a 5GC mastering UE for dual-connection data transmission operations
  • Fig. 14a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
  • Figure 14b is a schematic diagram of the MN initiating an adding process
  • Fig. 15a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
  • Figure 15b is a schematic diagram of the MN initiating a modification process
  • Fig. 16a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
  • Figure 16b is a schematic diagram of the MN initiating a deletion process
  • Fig. 17a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
  • Figure 17b is a schematic diagram of the 5GC initiating and adding process
  • Fig. 18a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
  • Figure 18b is a schematic diagram of the SN initiated modification process
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • connection device 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 1 is an architecture diagram of an Aggregated NG-RAN base station.
  • many NG-RAN base stations such as gNB or ng-eNB, etc.
  • NG-RAN base stations such as gNB or ng-eNB, etc.
  • NG-C control plane (signaling) connection and NG-U user plane (user data) connection.
  • NG-RAN base stations (gNB or ng-eNB) are connected to each other via Xn interfaces (including Xn-C control plane connection and Xn-U user plane connection).
  • the control plane connection of the above interface is used to transmit control signaling messages between network element nodes, such as NGAP (Next Generation Application Protocol) and XnAP protocol process messages.
  • NGAP Next Generation Application Protocol
  • the user plane connection is used to transmit user service data (packet/frame/block), etc.
  • NGAP and XnAP are respectively NG-C and Xn-C control plane logic network application layer protocols, which are based on the lower layer bearer transmission (Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) connection) to transmit control signaling process messages on the corresponding interface .
  • SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol
  • NG-U, Xn-U user plane interface user service data based on the lower layer bearer transmission (such as GTP-U tunnel) to transmit the user service data on the corresponding interface.
  • the NG-RAN base station and the served terminal UE are connected to each other through the Uu air interface (i.e., wireless air interface).
  • the Uu air interface includes multiple air interface control plane signaling radio bearer (SRB) and multiple air interface user plane data radio bearer (DRB).
  • the physical location relative to a specific latitude and longitude on the ground is relatively static and fixed. Therefore, the configuration and provision of radio coverage/capacity (Coverage and Capacity) of the air interface Uu serving cell (Serving Cell) provided by each NG-RAN base station, as well as the NG and Xn interface examples connecting these NG-RAN neighboring base stations, etc.,
  • the relative physical location is also fixed. For example, most of the bearer transmission of interface connections such as NG and Xn are implemented through fixed network transmission methods such as broadband optical fibers. Therefore, the robustness, delay, signaling and data transmission efficiency of the network side interface connection The other aspects are relatively good.
  • This relatively static and fixed land-based ground cellular mobile network is convenient for operators' planning and deployment and RRM (Radio Resource Management, radio resource management).
  • RRM Radio Resource Management, radio resource management
  • FIG 2 in a heterogeneous large network with mixed deployment of macro and micro service cells, there may be various types of base stations with different RAT standards, different carrier frequencies and operating bandwidths, and different wireless coverage capabilities, such as: 4G legacy eNB , 5G gNB, ng-eNB, WLAN AP (Wireless Local Area Networks Access Point, wireless local area network access point) and other network element nodes, they can interact with each other.
  • the 5G system supports the terminal UE in SC (Single Connectivity, single connection) and DC/MC (Dual/Multiple Connectivity, dual/multiple connection) working modes.
  • SC Single Connectivity, single connection
  • DC/MC Dual/Multiple Connectivity, dual/multiple connection
  • multi-connection is the logical dimension expansion of dual-connection
  • the description of dual-connection DC will be the main description below.
  • SC single connection working mode the UE has only one signaling or data transmission channel on the air interface Uu and the network side, which is called a radio link (RL).
  • RL radio link
  • the DC/MC (dual/multiple) connection working mode the UE has two or more signaling or data transmission channels on the air interface and the network side, that is, multiple relatively independent RLs.
  • multiple air interface signaling radio bearer SRB and data radio bearer DRB can be configured and used on the above dual/multiple RLs .
  • MN Master Node
  • SN Secondary Nodes
  • MR-DC Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity
  • 5G related protocols Take the MR-DC (Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity) working mode supported by 5G related protocols as an example, for specific terminal UE objects, when the UE is in the overlapping coverage area of the MN primary serving cell and SN secondary serving cell at the same time
  • main base station MN under the control of the main base station MN, there will be NG-C and NG-U interface connections between MN and 5GC, and Xn-C and Xn-U interfaces will be connected between MN and SN, but SN and There can only be NG-U connection between 5GC. Therefore, all basic operations of the UE entering, exiting, and in the dual-connection working mode are completed by the master base station MN.
  • the main base station MN is based on the UE's RRM measurement report for the constantly changing radio conditions of the air interface, as well as the local RRM algorithm conditions of the main base station. Coordination of resources such as transmission.
  • Most of the control plane operations between SN, 5GC, and UE are connected through the Xn-C interface and forwarded by the MN node.
  • the dashed line represents the control plane connection between the network element nodes
  • the dotted line represents the user plane connection between the network element nodes.
  • Figure 4a shows the SN terminated (Terminated) bearer type, focusing on the network element node MN/SN and the UPF node (may be referred to as UPF).
  • UPF User Plane
  • the first channel is the data transmission channel between UPF and MN provided by NG-U (MN), which is used to transmit MN-side PDU (Protocol Data Unit) Session (session)/QoS (Quality of Service) Quality)
  • MN-side PDU Protocol Data Unit
  • Session session
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • the establishment of this channel requires UPF to provide "MN side uplink data transmission channel address" and MN to provide "MN side downlink data transmission channel address”.
  • the second channel is the data transmission channel between UPF and SN provided by NG-U (SN), which is used to transmit the uplink and downlink data packets carried on the SN-side PDU Session/QoS Flows.
  • an Xn-U bearer needs to be established and maintained between the MN and the SN, because all user service data flows need to occur between the MN and the SN.
  • the supported dual/multiple connection operation must rely on the Xn-C interface between the MN and SN, and multiple primary and secondary base stations participating in the dual/multiple connection operation rely on it to coordinate resource configuration and working status with each other. And update.
  • the radio link between the terminal UE and the satellite base station is usually called the Service link, which faces the served UE and directly carries user service data and RRC signaling on the 5G NR Uu air interface. From the perspective of a single user terminal UE, even if the UE is in the same location, as the satellite base station continues to move, the service link of the UE will change accordingly.
  • the wireless link between the satellite base station and the service ground station is usually called the Feeder link, which is used to further connect the E2E (End to End) between the service link and the ground core network. End) connection, so as to realize the control signaling and user data transmission between the UE and the ground network.
  • the serving ground station may include a satellite ground gateway NTN-GW (Non-Terrestrial Networks Gateway), a core network, and other centralized control network element nodes.
  • Feeder link at least needs to provide the transmission function between the satellite base station and the ground core network 5GC. If the satellite base station is a complete gNB, the Feeder link needs to provide a stable transmission service for the NG interface, that is, reliable transmission of NGAP control signaling process messages and NG-U user service data.
  • satellite base stations have been moving at high speed, it is usually assumed that the feeder link between them and the terrestrial gateway NTN-GW can be robust enough.
  • a relatively stable NG interface connection instance can be established, and multiple NTN-GW transport layers on the ground can be routed and relayed through multiple hops and relays without frequent update and maintenance of the NG interface instance.
  • the satellite base station Moving Node1 gradually moves to the left from the jurisdiction of the ground station 2 to the jurisdiction of the ground station 3, through the ground transmission relay between the ground station 2 and the ground station 3, you can The default instance of the NG interface between the satellite base station and the anchor network element of the ground core network remains unchanged. Therefore, there is no need to delete the old NG interface connection and rebuild the new NG interface connection, and so on.
  • the characteristics of the above-mentioned terminal UE dual/multiple connection operation include the fixed physical location of the primary and secondary base stations, the fixed and relatively robust Xn interface connection, and the MN master control.
  • the characteristics of the deployment of mobile base stations represented by satellite base stations include satellite base stations moving regularly and periodically along the orbit, and the Xn interface connection is not fixed and the robustness is relatively low.
  • Combining the characteristics of UE dual/multiple connection operation and the characteristics of mobile base station deployment if the UE needs to perform dual/multiple connection operation between the ground fixed base station and the mobile satellite base station (abbreviation: ground-air dual/multiple connection), because It cannot rely on the Xn interface between the primary and secondary base stations, but can rely on the relatively more stable NG interface.
  • This application provides a method for controlling the terminal UE to perform dual/multiple connection data transmission operations through the core network 5GC, without establishing and maintaining the Xn interface connection between the primary and secondary base stations (no Xn-C or Xn-U interface connection).
  • 5GC and primary and secondary base stations have their own independent NG interface connection, and at the same time they are connected through NG-C and NG-U interfaces.
  • the user plane bearer related to this application is different from the SN Terminated bearer type of Figure 4a: the secondary base station SN and AMF/SMF are also connected through an independent NG-C interface to realize the direct resource configuration management and work of the SN by the 5GC. Collaboration etc.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by an embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the core network side. As shown in Figure 7, the method may include:
  • Step S11 Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S12 Receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
  • the network element of the core network may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection.
  • the core network element for example, 5GC
  • the core network element can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed.
  • changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations may include: the target terminal changes from single connection to multiple base stations, or the target terminal changes from multiple base stations to single connection, or the number of base stations to which the target terminal is connected Change occurs, or the base station to which the target terminal is connected changes, for example, from connecting with base stations A and B to connecting with base stations A and C.
  • the 5GC can send a first indication message to the target secondary base station to establish, add, modify, delete, or delete the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. Release and other operations.
  • the target secondary base station After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may send a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
  • the following respectively introduces the types and contents of the first indication message and the first indication information corresponding to different operation scenarios.
  • Scene 1 Create or add scenes.
  • the first indication message may be a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message
  • the first indication information includes the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to be offloaded to User service characteristic information of the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 2 Modify the scene.
  • the first indication message may be a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information includes user service feature information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or users who are re-distributed to the target secondary base station Business feature information.
  • Scene 3 Release or delete the scene.
  • the first indication message may be a secondary base station release (release) command message or a secondary base station delete (delete) command message, and the first indication information includes the remaining user service features on the target secondary base station to be deleted information.
  • the overall radio link capability of the UE may be divided into multiple relatively independent parts.
  • the first part is the main connection capability
  • the second part is one or more auxiliary connection capabilities.
  • P-UE is used to identify the primary connection capability of the UE
  • S-UE is used to identify the secondary connection capability.
  • the capability objects of various shareable attributes in the UE can be divided according to a specific ratio. For example: segmentation of hardware resources such as RF (Radio Frequency) and antenna module group, power amplifier, Buffer (buffer) resources, baseband processor, etc. that can be shared within the UE.
  • software resources such as band combination (Band Combination) information and bearer identifier (RB id) supported by the UE are divided.
  • segmentation of protocol resources and coding resource space For example, segmentation of protocol resources and coding resource space.
  • the resource information of the target terminal may include resources that need to be used to establish a secondary connection with the target terminal.
  • the resource information of the target terminal may include radio resources related to PDU session 1, and may also include the control plane connected to the S-NG interface related to the secondary base station , User plane and transmission resources.
  • the user service characteristic information in the indication information may include user service identification information (e.g. PDU Session id), bearer configuration information (e.g. QoS Flow Level QoS Parameters), and data forwarding transmission channel address (such as: UP Data Forwarding TNL Info) etc.
  • user service identification information e.g. PDU Session id
  • bearer configuration information e.g. QoS Flow Level QoS Parameters
  • data forwarding transmission channel address Such as: UP Data Forwarding TNL Info
  • the method may further include:
  • a second indication message is sent to the primary base station, where the second indication message includes the first result information and the information corresponding to the first result information Main connection command information.
  • the types and contents of the second indication message and the second indication message are respectively as follows:
  • Scene 1 Create or add scenes.
  • the second indication message may be a secondary base station establishment command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
  • the first result information in the second indication message may include that the target secondary base station has established a secondary connection with the UE by using the UE's S-UE capability, and the PDU session that has been offloaded to the target secondary base station, etc. Characteristic information of user services, etc.
  • the main connection command information corresponding to the first result information may include the current available main connection capability and resource information of the UE.
  • the second indication message can instruct the primary base station to delete the characteristic information of user services such as PDU sessions offloaded to the target secondary base station from the primary base station. It can also instruct the primary base station to use the complete UE capabilities and resources to establish a primary connection with the UE and update it to use The UE's P-UE capabilities and resources establish a primary connection with the UE.
  • Scene 2 Modify the scene.
  • the second instruction message may be a secondary base station modification command message, and the second instruction message may include available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
  • the first result information in the second indication message may include characteristic information of user services such as PDU sessions that need to be returned to the primary base station or have been offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  • the main connection command information corresponding to the first result information may include the current available main connection capability and resource information of the UE.
  • the second indication message can instruct the primary base station to delete the characteristic information of user services such as PDU sessions that are offloaded to the target secondary base station from the primary base station, and add the characteristic information of user services that need to be returned to the primary base station. It can also instruct the primary base station to use the UE’s Currently available P-UE capabilities and resources, update the primary connection with the UE.
  • Scene 3 Release or delete the scene.
  • the second indication message may be a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
  • the first result information in the second indication message may include characteristic information of user services such as remaining PDU sessions on the target secondary base station that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
  • the main connection command information corresponding to the first result information may include the current available main connection capability and resource information of the UE.
  • the second indication message may indicate that the characteristic information of the user service such as the PDU session deleted from the target secondary base station is returned to the primary base station. If all the secondary base stations are released from multiple connections to single connections, the second indication message can instruct the primary base station to re-use the complete UE capabilities and resources to establish a primary connection with the UE.
  • the user service characteristic information may include user service identification information, bearer configuration information, and transmission channel address for data forwarding.
  • the user service characteristic information in the first demand information includes identification information of the user service.
  • the user service characteristic information in the first indication information and the second indication information includes the bearer configuration information of the user service, the transmission channel address of the data forwarding, and the like.
  • This embodiment can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform designated operations on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal through the core network element, without relying on the interaction between the base stations, and instruct the primary and secondary base stations to update the primary connection with the target terminal, which is beneficial to Improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the core network side. As shown in Figure 8, the method may include:
  • Step S21 Receive a first demand message from a primary base station, the first demand message being sent by the primary base station upon detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, and the first demand message
  • a demand message includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the auxiliary connection.
  • the first demand information includes demand information for the establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S22 Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S23 Receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
  • the primary base station may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection.
  • the primary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment.
  • the primary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it can send the first demand message to the core network element.
  • the core network element sends the first indication message to the target secondary base station.
  • the target secondary base station After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs designated operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the target secondary base station After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
  • the following respectively introduces the type and content of the first demand message corresponding to different operation scenarios.
  • Scene 1 Create or add scenes.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 2 Modify the scene.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 3 Release or delete the scene.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message
  • the first demand message includes the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the type and content of the first indication message and the first response message in the above scenario can refer to the related description of the above embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the method may further include:
  • a second indication message is sent to the primary base station, where the second indication message includes the first result information and the information corresponding to the first result information Main connection command information.
  • the 5GC may send the second indication information to the primary base station.
  • the type and content of the second indication message reference may be made to the related description of the foregoing embodiment, which is not repeated here.
  • the user service characteristic information may include user service identification information, bearer configuration information, and transmission channel address for data forwarding.
  • the user service characteristic information in the second requirement information includes identification information of the user service.
  • the user service characteristic information in the first indication information and the second indication information includes the bearer configuration information of the user service, the transmission channel address of the data forwarding, and the like.
  • this embodiment can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal through the core network element, and instruct the primary and secondary base station to update the primary and secondary base station with the target terminal. Connection does not need to rely on interaction between base stations, which is beneficial to improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the core network side. As shown in Figure 9, the method may include:
  • Step S31 Receive a second demand message from the target secondary base station, where the second demand message is sent by the target secondary base station when it detects that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, so
  • the second demand message includes second demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the second demand information includes demand information for modification, deletion, or release of the secondary connection.
  • Step S32 Send a third instruction message to the primary base station, where the third instruction message includes primary connection command information corresponding to the second demand information.
  • Step S33 Receive a second response message from the primary base station, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the primary connection command information.
  • Step S34 Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the specified operation includes modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S35 Receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
  • the secondary base station can initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection.
  • the secondary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment.
  • the target secondary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it may send the second demand information to the core network element. After receiving the second demand information, the core network element may send a third indication message to the main base station. After the main base station updates its own user service and main connection according to the third instruction message, it returns a second response message to the core network element.
  • the core network element may send the first indication message to the target secondary base station.
  • the target secondary base station can perform designated operations such as modification, deletion, or release on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the target secondary base station may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
  • Scene 1 Modify the scene.
  • the second demand message may be a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
  • the third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
  • the target secondary base station sends a secondary base station modification requirement message to the core network element.
  • the core network element can send the secondary base station modification request message to the primary base station.
  • the primary base station updates its own user service and primary connection according to the secondary base station modification request message, it returns a second response message to the core network element.
  • the core network element may send a secondary base station modification command message to the target secondary base station.
  • the target secondary base station receives the secondary base station modification command message, modifies the secondary connection with the target terminal, and may return a first response message to the core network element.
  • Scene 2 Release or delete the scene.
  • the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message
  • the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and needs to be returned to the target secondary base station of the primary base station The remaining user service characteristic information.
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
  • the target secondary base station sends a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message to the core network element.
  • the core network element After the core network element receives the secondary base station release demand message or the secondary base station delete demand message, it can send the secondary base station release command message or the secondary base station delete command message to the primary base station.
  • the primary base station updates its user service and primary connection according to the secondary base station release command message or the secondary base station delete command message, it returns a second response message to the core network element.
  • the core network element may send a secondary base station release command message or secondary base station delete command message to the target secondary base station.
  • the target secondary base station After the target secondary base station receives the secondary base station release command message or secondary base station delete command message, it deletes the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, returns the first response message to the core network element, and can release or delete the target secondary base station. Base station.
  • the core network element can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and instruct the primary and secondary base station to update the communication with the target terminal.
  • the main connection does not need to rely on the interaction between base stations, which helps to improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the access network side. As shown in Figure 10, the method may include:
  • Step S41 Receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S42 Perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • Step S43 Send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
  • the network element of the core network may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection.
  • the core network element for example, 5GC
  • the core network element can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed.
  • the 5GC senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it may send a first indication message to the target secondary base station.
  • the target secondary base station After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs designated operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the target secondary base station After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may send a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
  • the following respectively introduces the types and contents of the first indication message and the first indication information corresponding to different operation scenarios.
  • Scene 1 Create or add scenes.
  • the first indication message may be a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message
  • the first indication information may include the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need for offloading User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 2 Modify the scene.
  • the first indication message may be a secondary base station modification request message
  • the first indication information may include user service characteristic information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re-distributed to the target secondary base station.
  • User service characteristic information may be a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information may include user service characteristic information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re-distributed to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 3 Release or delete the scene.
  • the first indication message may be a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message
  • the first indication information may include remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station to be deleted.
  • the types and contents of the second indication message and the second indication message are respectively as follows:
  • Scene 1 Create or add scenes.
  • the second indication message may be a secondary base station establishment command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 2 Modify the scene.
  • the second instruction message may be a secondary base station modification command message, and the second instruction message may include available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 3 Release or delete the scene.
  • the second indication message may be a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
  • the method may further include: receiving a second indication message from the core network element, where the second indication message is when the core network element is in the first A result information indicates that it is sent when the specified operation is successful, and the second indication message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
  • the core network element may send a second indication message to the primary base station. After receiving the second indication message, the primary base station can update the primary connection between the primary base station and the target terminal.
  • the type and content of the first indication message, the first indication information, the first response message, the second indication message, etc. in this embodiment are the same as those of the embodiment in FIG. 7, and reference may be made to the relevant description of this embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the access network side. As shown in Figure 11, the method may include:
  • Step S51 In the case of detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and the multiple base stations has changed, send a first demand message to the core network element, where the first demand message includes information on the secondary connection First demand information for performing the specified operation, where the first demand message includes a demand for establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection.
  • Step S52 Receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the specified operation includes The establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S53 Perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • Step S54 Send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
  • the primary base station may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection.
  • the primary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment.
  • the primary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it can send the first demand message to the core network element.
  • the core network element sends the first indication message to the target secondary base station.
  • the target secondary base station After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs designated operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the target secondary base station After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
  • the following respectively introduces the type and content of the first demand message corresponding to different operation scenarios.
  • Scene 1 Create or add scenes.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 2 Modify the scene.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
  • Scene 3 Release or delete the scene.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message
  • the first demand message includes the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the method may further include: receiving a second indication message from the core network element, where the second indication message is when the core network element is in the first A result information indicates that it is sent when the specified operation is successful, and the second indication message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
  • the type and content of the first demand message, the first demand information, the first instruction message, the first instruction information, the first response message, the second instruction message, etc. in this embodiment are the same as those of the embodiment of FIG. 8. The relevant description of the example will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the access network side. As shown in Figure 12, the method may include:
  • Step S61 In the case of detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, send a second demand message to the core network element, where the second demand message includes information on the secondary connection Second demand information for performing the specified operation.
  • the second demand information includes a demand for modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S62 Receive a third instruction message from the core network element, where the third instruction message includes main connection command information corresponding to the second demand information.
  • Step S63 Send a second response message to the core network element, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the main connection command information.
  • Step S64 Receive a first instruction message from the core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the specified operation includes modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • Step S65 Perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • Step S66 Send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
  • the secondary base station can initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection.
  • the secondary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment.
  • the target secondary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it may send the second demand information to the core network element. After receiving the second demand information, the core network element may send a third indication message to the main base station. After receiving the third indication message, the main base station may update its user service and main connection according to the third indication message, and then return a second response message to the core network element.
  • the core network element may send the first indication message to the target secondary base station.
  • the target secondary base station can perform designated operations such as modification, deletion, or release on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the target secondary base station may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
  • Scene 1 Modify the scene.
  • the second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
  • the third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
  • Scene 2 Release or delete the scene.
  • the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message
  • the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and needs to be returned to the target secondary base station of the primary base station The remaining user service characteristic information.
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
  • the second demand message, the second demand information, the third instruction message, the second response information, the first instruction message, the first instruction information, the first response message, the second instruction message, etc. in this embodiment and the embodiment of FIG. 9 The type and content of the are the same, please refer to the related description of this embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • performing the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal includes: according to the target The available auxiliary connection capability and resource information in the terminal, as well as the user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target auxiliary base station, establish an auxiliary connection with the target terminal to offload the user service to the target auxiliary base station, so that the target auxiliary base station The base station continues to carry the transmission.
  • performing the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal includes: deleting user service bearer transmission resources that need to be returned from the target secondary base station, or re-offloading users The service allocates new bearer transmission resources.
  • performing the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal includes: deleting the remaining user service bearer transmission resources from the target secondary base station, and releasing or deleting the target Secondary base station.
  • the following is an application example of the present application in the dual connection mode.
  • the principle of the multi-connection mode is similar to the dual connection mode. You can refer to the related description of the dual connection mode.
  • the movement of the target SN has a predictable regularity. There is no need to establish an Xn interface connection between the target SN and MN, but the target SN and 5GC can establish an S-NG interface connection. 5GC and MN can infer and predict when and which target SN can be added as offload secondary base station through positioning and time information.
  • UE capability segmentation can be performed according to a predefined static method (relatively fixed segmentation); it can also be segmented semi-statically according to the command method of the network side, which can change the specific segmented capability content and main and auxiliary as needed.
  • Side ratio The capabilities of P-UE and S-UE may include partitioning objects with sharable attribute capabilities at a specific ratio. For example: hardware resources such as RF (Radio Frequency), antenna module group, Buffer (buffer) resources and baseband processor that can be shared within the UE, or supported band combination (Band Combination) information, bearer identification (RB id) And other software resources.
  • the capability of P-UE and S-UE segmentation may also include segmentation for non-shared attribute capabilities.
  • the resources corresponding to a certain RAT standard are all given to the P-UE, and the resources corresponding to other RATs are all given to the S-UE.
  • the relationship between them is not the aforementioned proportional division.
  • a UE that is "capacity-divided” can present two relatively independent “virtual sub UEs" to the outside within a certain observation or operation time window. Their respective wireless capabilities set can be perceived and utilized by the primary and secondary base stations MN/SN and the core network 5GC.
  • the status and mobility of the P-UE represent the overall RRC status and mobility of the UE; the S-UE mainly provides an auxiliary offloading function for user plane data transmission, and does not affect the overall control plane attributes and RRC status of the UE.
  • the primary base station can utilize all the radio link capabilities of the UE, and can report to the 5GC in advance through the NGAP process message.
  • P-UE and S-UE capability division methods are as follows:
  • the 5GC receives and saves the information of the above-mentioned P-UE and S-UE capability division method, and then performs the dual connection operation for backup.
  • the primary base station MN can infer and predict when and which target SN can be added as the offloaded secondary base station SN through the positioning and time information, that is, the target SN has the conditions for dual connection operation with the MN. Therefore, the network side can perform operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the SN, without relying on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and the MN can trigger the 5GC in real time as needed.
  • the main base station MN can request the 5GC to establish or add a specific target SN through the NGAP process message.
  • the MN sends a NGAP: SN Addition Required message to the 5GC, which includes the target SN information and the current MN side user service data information to be offloaded by the SN bearer, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id (identification), etc.
  • the 5GC can instruct the MN to enter the dual-connection working mode based on the NGAP process message.
  • the MN only uses the radio link capability of the P-UE side indicated by the 5GC, and no longer uses the radio link capability of the S-UE side.
  • the MN receives the NGAP process message from 5GC: SN Addition Command message, which indicates a certain 5GC selected P-UE x+S-UE y capability division combination or related index identification and the user who was successfully offloaded by the target SN Service data information, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identification, etc.
  • the main base station MN and UE After entering the dual-connection working mode, the main base station MN and UE establish and maintain P-RL (Primary Radio Link), and have P-NG-C main control plane connection and P-NG-U main user plane connection instances with 5GC They are used to transmit control signaling and user service data on the MN side.
  • P-RL Primary Radio Link
  • P-NG-C main control plane connection and P-NG-U main user plane connection instances with 5GC They are used to transmit control signaling and user service data on the MN side.
  • the specific operations are similar to those of the UE single connection.
  • the main base station MN can also request the 5GC to modify, delete or release the current target SN through the NGAP process message.
  • MN sends NGAP: SN Modification Required message or SN Release Required message to 5GC, which includes the target SN to be modified or deleted and related user service data information.
  • MN receives the NGAP process message from 5GC: SN Modification Command or SN Release Command message, which includes the modified or deleted target SN and related user service data information confirmed by 5GC .
  • the 5GC can also predict and predict: when the target MN under its jurisdiction can add which target SN as the offload secondary base station SN, that is, in which time window the target MN and SN have the conditions for dual connection operation. Therefore, the 5GC can actively trigger and determine the network-side SN establishment, addition, modification, deletion, or release operations, and there is no need to rely on the NGAP uplink message request of the primary base station MN at this time.
  • the 5GC receives a request from the autonomous base station MN to establish, add, modify, delete, or release the target SN, it can decide whether to enter, modify or exit the dual connection working mode.
  • the 5GC If the 5GC decides to enter the dual-connection working mode, it will send the SN add request operation to the target SN through the NGAP process message, and try to establish the S-NG-C auxiliary control plane connection, the S-NG-U auxiliary user plane connection instance, and the SN auxiliary Wireless link resources related to the base station side. This depends on how much UE user service data the MN or 5GC needs to offload to the SN side.
  • the 5GC sends the NGAP process message to the target SN: SN Addition Request message, which includes the user service data information originally belonging to the MN side to be established by the SN offload bearer, such as the PDU Session/QoS Flows id identifier.
  • the 5GC can also send NGAP process messages to the target SN: SN Modification Request or SN Release Command messages, which include user service data information on the current SN to be modified or deleted by the SN, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identification.
  • the target secondary base station SN Based on the NGAP process message from 5GC, the target secondary base station SN tries to establish S-NG-C secondary control plane connection, S-NG-U secondary user plane connection instance and SN secondary base station side related wireless link resources, and passes the NGAP process The message replies to the result of the above SN establishment by 5GC.
  • SN sends NGAP process message to 5GC: SN Addition Request Acknowledge message, which includes user service data information established successfully and failed, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identification and Data Forwarding transmission channel address.
  • the target secondary base station SN attempts to perform SN modification or deletion related operations based on the NGAP process message from 5GC, and replies to the 5GC with the result of the above modification or deletion. For example: SN sends NGAP process message to 5GC: SN Modification Request Acknowledge or SN Release Complete message.
  • the secondary base station SN After the UE enters the dual-connection working mode, the secondary base station SN establishes and maintains the S-RL secondary radio link with the UE, and at the same time has an S-NG-C secondary control plane connection and S-NG-U secondary user plane connection instance with the 5GC. They are used to transmit control signaling and user service data on the SN side.
  • the specific operations are similar to the current UE single-connection operations.
  • the secondary base station SN can actively request the 5GC to modify and delete the current SN through the NGAP process message.
  • the SN actively triggers the sending of the NGAP process message to the 5GC: SN Modification Required message or SN Release Required message, which includes the pending SN Modified or deleted user service data information on the current SN side, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identifier.
  • the 5GC can be implemented internally, without the SN Release Required message request of the MN or SN, and it actively triggers the decision whether to exit the current dual-connection working mode. If the 5GC decides to exit the dual-connection working mode, it will instruct the target MN and SN to return to the single-connection working mode through the NGAP process message. After that, the MN can resume using all the radio link capabilities of the entire UE. For example, 5GC sends NGAP process messages: SN Release Command messages to the target MN and SN respectively.
  • the S-NG-C secondary control plane connection, the S-NG-U secondary user plane connection instance, and the radio link resources related to the SN secondary base station side can all be released, or temporarily SN The secondary base station remains but deactivation does not work.
  • the P-NG-C main control plane connection, the P-NG-U main user plane connection instance, and the radio link resources related to the MN main base station side can all be reconfigured and updated.
  • This application provides a method for controlling a UE to perform dual/multiple connection data transmission operations through a core network (5GC).
  • This method does not need to establish or maintain the Xn interface connection between the primary and secondary base stations (for example, there may be no Xn-C or Xn-U interface connection), and the 5GC and the primary and secondary base stations need to establish and maintain their own independent NG interface connections (set up at the same time) NG-C and NG-U interface connection).
  • the network side manages the UE dual/multiple connection working mode, without relying on the UE's RRM measurement and reporting for the target SN, and uses its own base station location and time and other prior information (such as the ephemeris information of the satellite base station) to predict the target MN and SN
  • the conditional relationship between the dual/multiple connection operation so as to manage the UE dual/multiple connection working mode more flexibly.
  • This application can support the MN and SN to trigger certain basic operations of dual/multiple connections, and the 5GC will make the final decision and management of user service data shunting and returning.
  • Application example 1 MN initiates the process of establishing or adding SN.
  • LEO low-orbit satellites In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example.
  • NTN-GW satellite ground station gateway
  • Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 14a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (the small ellipse in Figure 14a).
  • the process of MN initiating adding SN may include the following steps:
  • the anchor point of the satellite base station A-gNB1 is connected to the NTN-GW/5GC1, and the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1.
  • MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover. Therefore, MN and 5GC1 can infer that during the observation period before and after T1, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN have a certain overlap, so that the ground-air dual connection operation may be performed.
  • a connected UE is being served by the main base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 14a), and PDU Session 1 (PDU Session 1) and PDU Session 2 (PDU Session 2) have been established for user service data related radio resources and NG interface connection transmission Channel etc.
  • the UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the supportable capability division information to the MN and 5GC1.
  • PDU Session1 user service data can be carried and transmitted by the LEO satellite radio link.
  • the MN can report and coordinate the P-UE and S-UE capabilities and resource partitioning supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message. information.
  • UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT a terminal radio capability report
  • UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION a terminal capability information indication
  • the MN does not rely on the UE's RRM measurement report, and sends a secondary base station add request (SN ADDITION REQUIRED) message to the 5GC1 at an appropriate time.
  • the message includes a request to offload all the QoS Flows in the PDU Session1 currently carrying the service on the MN side to the target secondary base station SN-gNB1.
  • the MN can also suggest a data forwarding operation to reduce data packet loss in the offloading operation.
  • the data forwarding may include continuing to send to 5GC1 the remaining unsuccessful data packets of user services that need to be offloaded on the source node side.
  • 5GC1 receives the demand message of the MN, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that all QoS Flows in PDU Session1 can be diverted to the target SN-gNB1.
  • 5GC1 sends the secondary base station to SN-gNB1 Add request (SN ADDITION REQUEST) message.
  • This message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 of the available S-UE capabilities, requesting the establishment of PDU and Session1 related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
  • SN-gNB1 receives the 5GC1 request message, and performs local resource admission control. If SN-gNB1 determines that all relevant resources can be successfully established for PDU Session1, it can send a secondary base station addition response message to 5GC1, such as a secondary base station addition confirmation (SN ADDITION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message.
  • the message includes notifying 5GC1 that PDU Session1 has been successfully established, as well as related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
  • SN-gNB1 can also provide transmission address information for data forwarding at the same time, so as to realize the data forwarding operation from the MN side.
  • S104 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from SN-gNB1, knows that the SN-gNB1 side has successfully offloaded to establish PDU Session1, and can send a secondary base station add command (SN ADDITION COMMAND) message to the MN.
  • the message includes the P-UE capabilities and resources available to the MN to notify the MN to enter the dual connectivity operation, and the result of successfully offloading PDU Session1 to the SN-gNB1 side. Then the MN can delete the related radio resources of the original service PDU Session1, the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
  • MN and P-UE use RRC reconfiguration messages to establish and maintain the P-RL radio link, and then only transmit PDU Session2 user service data.
  • SN-gNB1 and S-UE use RRC reconfiguration messages to establish and maintain S-RL radio links, and then only transmit PDU and Session1 user service data.
  • Addition in this application example is sometimes called CREATE.
  • the message related to the addition can also be modified to the message related to the establishment.
  • a secondary base station establishment request (SN CREATE REQUIRED) message
  • a secondary base station establishment request (SN CREATE REQUEST) message
  • a secondary base station establishment confirmation (SN CREATE REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message
  • a secondary base station establishment command (SN CREATE COMMAND) message, etc.
  • the following other application examples are similar situations, so I won't repeat them.
  • Application example 2 MN initiates the process of modifying SN.
  • LEO low-orbit satellites In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. Several satellite ground station gateway NTN-GW entities are deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example.
  • gNB satellites gNB base station functions
  • NTN-GW entities are deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity.
  • Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GC
  • Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 15a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (small ellipse in Figure 15a).
  • the process of MN initiating to modify SN may include the following steps:
  • MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover. Therefore, both MN and 5GC1 can infer that during the observation period before and after T2, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN have a certain overlap, so that the ground-air dual connection operation can be maintained .
  • a UE that is already in ground-air dual connection operation is being served by the primary base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 15a) and secondary base station SN-gNB1 (large ellipse in Figure 15a) at the same time, and PDU Session 2 and PDU Session 1 user services have been established respectively Data-related wireless resources and NG interfaces are connected to transmission channels, etc.
  • the UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the updated capability division information to the MN and 5GC1. According to the system's local policy (such as roaming security or billing factors), part of the QoS Flows user service data in PDU Session 1 needs to be returned to the MN for transmission.
  • the MN can report the updated P-UE and S-UE capability split information supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message .
  • UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT a terminal radio capability report
  • UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION a terminal capability information indication
  • the MN does not rely on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUIRED) message to the 5GC1 at an appropriate time.
  • This message includes a request to return part of the QoS Flows in the PDU Session1 currently carrying the service on the SN-gNB1 side to the MN for bearer transmission.
  • the MN can also suggest a data forwarding (Data Forwarding) operation.
  • Data Forwarding data forwarding
  • the corresponding data forwarding transmission address information can be provided in the above message to reduce data packet loss in the return operation.
  • 5GC1 receives the demand message of the MN, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session1 can be returned to the MN.
  • 5GC1 sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST) message to the target SN-gNB1.
  • the message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 of the available S-UE capabilities after the update, and requesting that SN-gNB1 focus on configuring the remaining part of the PDU and Session1 related radio resources, and the control plane, user plane and transmission connected to the S-NG interface Resources etc.
  • S203 SN-gNB1 receives the request message of 5GC1, deletes part of QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session1 to be returned, and reconfigures the remaining part of PDU Session1. Then, SN-gNB1 sends a secondary base station modification response message to 5GC1, for example, a secondary base station modification confirmation (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message.
  • This message includes notifying 5GC1 that it has successfully deleted some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session1, as well as successfully reconfiguring related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
  • SN-gNB1 can also perform data forwarding (Data Forwarding) for some of the returned QoS Flows.
  • S204: 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from SN-gNB1, knows that SN-gNB1 has successfully deleted some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session1, and can send SN MODIFICATION COMMAND message to MN.
  • This message includes the requirement to notify the MN to maintain the available P-UE capabilities and resources after the update of the dual connectivity operation, and to successfully return part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session 1 to the MN side. Then the MN re-establishes part of the QoS Flows and related radio resources in the returned PDU Session1, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
  • MN and P-UE continue to maintain the P-RL radio link through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then continue to transmit PDU Session2 user service data and part of the returned PDU Session1 user service data.
  • SN-gNB1 and S-UE continue to maintain the S-RL radio link through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then continue to transmit part of the remaining PDU and Session1 user service data.
  • Application example 3 MN initiates the process of releasing or deleting SN.
  • LEO low-orbit satellites In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example.
  • NTN-GW satellite ground station gateway
  • Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 16a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (small ellipse in Figure 16a).
  • the process of MN initiating release of SN may include the following steps:
  • the constantly moving satellite base station A-gNB1 is still anchored to the NTN-GW/5GC1, while the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1.
  • Both MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will run to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover.
  • MN and 5GC1 can speculate that during the observation period before and after T3, the overlap between the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN will gradually disappear, and the UE needs to withdraw from the satellite base station A- Ground-air dual connection operation of gNB1.
  • the MN can continue to try to establish a new ground-air dual connection operation with the following satellite base station B-gNB2.
  • a UE that is already in ground-air dual connection operation is being served by the primary base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 16a) and secondary base station SN-gNB1 (large ellipse in Figure 16a) at the same time, and PDU Session 2 and PDU Session 1 user services have been established respectively Data-related wireless resources and NG interfaces are connected to transmission channels, etc.
  • the UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of the application, and has reported the updated capability division information to the MN and 5GC1.
  • the MN can report the updated P-UE and S-UE capabilities and resource division supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message.
  • UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT a terminal radio capability report
  • UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION a terminal capability information indication
  • the MN does not rely on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and at an appropriate time, sends a SN RELEASE REQUIRED message to the 5GC1.
  • the message includes a request to return all the remaining QoS Flows in the PDU Session1 currently being served by the SN-gNB1 side to the MN bearer for transmission, so that the SN-gNB1 as the UE secondary base station can be deleted and the ground-air dual connection operation can be exited.
  • the MN can also recommend the Data Forwarding operation, and provide the corresponding data forwarding transmission address information in the above message to reduce data packet loss in the return operation.
  • 5GC1 receives the demand message of the MN, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that all remaining QoS Flows in PDU Session1 can be returned to the MN.
  • 5GC1 sends a secondary base station release command (SN RELEASE COMMAND) message to the target SN-gNB1.
  • the message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 to release, requesting to delete the remaining QoS Flows related radio resources in the SN-gNB1 side service PDU Session1, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
  • S303: SN-gNB1 receives the request message of 5GC1, can delete the remaining QoS Flows and all related resources in the PDU to be returned to Session1, and send a secondary base station release response message to 5GC1 after completion, for example: secondary base station release complete (SN RELEASE COMPLETE )news.
  • This message includes notifying 5GC1 that it has successfully deleted the remaining QoS Flows and all related resources in PDU Session 1 and that SN-gNB1, which is the secondary base station of the UE, has been deleted.
  • SN-gNB1 can also perform data forwarding (Data Forwarding) for the remaining QoS Flows returned.
  • S304: 5GC1 receives the release completion message of SN-gNB1, and learns that SN-gNB1 has successfully deleted the remaining QoS Flows and all related resources in PDU Session1, and thus sends a secondary base station release command (SN RELEASE COMMAND) message to the MN.
  • the message includes the requirement to notify the MN to quit the dual connectivity operation of the entire UE capabilities that can be used and the remaining QoS Flows in PDU Session 1 to the MN side. Then the MN re-establishes the remaining QoS Flows and related radio resources in the returned PDU Session1, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
  • the MN and the UE continue to maintain the P-RL radio link through the RRC reconfiguration message, and then continue to transmit PDU Session2 user service data and all reflowed PDU Session1 user service data.
  • the RRC release message is used between SN-gNB1 and S-UE to delete the original S-RL radio link. After that, SN-gNB1 no longer serves to transmit any PDU and Session user service data.
  • the release (RELEASE) in this application example is sometimes also called delete (DELETE).
  • the message related to release can also be modified to the message related to deletion.
  • a secondary base station delete request (SN DELETE REQUIRED) message a secondary base station delete command (SN DELETE COMMAND) message
  • SN DELETE COMPLETE a secondary base station delete success (SN DELETE COMPLETE) message, etc.
  • the following other application examples are similar situations, so I won't repeat them.
  • Application example 4 5GC initiates the process of establishing or adding SN.
  • LEO low-orbit satellites In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example.
  • NTN-GW satellite ground station gateway
  • Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 17a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (small ellipse in Figure 17a).
  • the MN can report and coordinate the information of the P-UE and S-UE capability division supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message.
  • the process of adding SN initiated by 5GC may include the following steps:
  • the anchor point of the satellite base station A-gNB1 is connected to the NTN-GW/5GC1, and the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1.
  • MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover. Wait. Therefore, both MN and 5GC1 can speculate that during a period of observation time before and after T1, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN overlap to a certain extent, so that the ground-air dual connection operation may be performed.
  • a UE in a connected state is being served by the main base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 17a), and radio resources related to user service data of PDU Session1 and PDU Session2 and NG interface connection transmission channels have been established.
  • the UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the supportable capability division information to the MN and 5GC1.
  • PDU Session2 user service data can be carried and transmitted by the LEO satellite radio link.
  • 5GC1 Based on the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, 5GC1 determines that all QoS Flows in PDU Session 2 can be diverted to the target SN-gNB1, so that at a suitable moment, 5GC1 directly sends the auxiliary to the target SN-gNB1 Base station addition request (SN ADDITION REQUEST) message.
  • This message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 of the available S-UE capabilities, requesting the establishment of PDU and Session1 related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
  • SN-gNB1 receives the 5GC1 request message and performs local resource admission control. If SN-gNB1 determines that all relevant resources can be successfully established for PDU Session2, it can send a secondary base station addition response message to 5GC1, such as a secondary base station addition confirmation (SN ADDITION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message. This message includes notifying 5GC1 that PDU Session2 has been successfully established, as well as related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface. SN-gNB1 can also provide transmission address information for data forwarding at the same time, so as to realize the data forwarding operation from the MN side.
  • SN ADDITION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE secondary base station addition confirmation
  • 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from SN-gNB1, knows that the SN-gNB1 side has successfully offloaded to establish PDU Session2, and can send a secondary base station add command (SN ADDITION COMMAND) message to the MN.
  • the message includes the P-UE capabilities and resources available to the MN informing the MN after entering the dual connectivity operation, and the result of successfully offloading PDU Session2 to the SN-gNB1 side. Then the MN can delete the related radio resources of the original service PDU Session2, the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
  • the P-RL radio link is established and maintained through the RRC reconfiguration message between the MN and the P-UE, and then only the PDU Session1 user service data is transmitted.
  • SN-gNB1 and S-UE establish and maintain S-RL radio links through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then only transmit PDU and Session2 user service data.
  • Application example 5 SN initiates the process of modifying SN.
  • LEO low-orbit satellites In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example.
  • NTN-GW satellite ground station gateway
  • Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 18a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with land-based ground cellular coverage (the small ellipse in Figure 18a).
  • the process of SN initiating modification of SN can include the following steps:
  • S500 At time T2 after T1, the constantly moving satellite base station A-gNB1 is still anchored to the NTN-GW/5GC1, while the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1.
  • MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and in which area its corresponding beam ground coverage is probably. Therefore, MN and 5GC1 can infer that during the observation period before and after T2, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN still overlap to a certain extent, so that the ground-air dual connection operation can be maintained. .
  • a UE that is already in ground-air dual connection operation is being served by the primary base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 18a) and secondary base station SN-gNB1 (large ellipse in Figure 18a) at the same time, and has established PDU Session 1 and PDU Session 2 user services Data-related wireless resources and NG interfaces are connected to transmission channels, etc.
  • the UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the updated capability division information to the MN and 5GC1. Due to the local overload of the SN-gNB1 satellite, SN-gNB1 hopes to return part of the QoS Flows user service data in PDU Session 2 to the MN to continue the bearer transmission.
  • the MN can report the updated P-UE and S-UE capability split information supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message .
  • UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT a terminal radio capability report
  • UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION a terminal capability information indication
  • SN-gNB1 According to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system, SN-gNB1 does not rely on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and actively sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUIRED) message to the 5GC1 at an appropriate time.
  • the message includes a request to return part of the QoS Flows in the PDU Session2 currently carrying the service on the SN-gNB1 side to the MN for bearer transmission.
  • SN-gNB1 can also suggest data forwarding (Data Forwarding) operation to reduce data packet loss in the return operation.
  • Data Forwarding data forwarding
  • 5GC1 receives the request message from SN-gNB1, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session 2 can be returned to the MN.
  • 5GC1 sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST) message to the MN.
  • the message includes notifying the MN of the available P-UE capabilities and resources after the update, requesting that the MN focus on configuring some of the reflowed PDUs and Session2 related radio resources, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
  • the MN receives the request message of 5GC1. If part of the QoS Flows and related resources in the returned PDU Session 2 are successfully established, a secondary base station modification response message, such as a secondary base station modification confirmation (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message, can be sent to the 5GC1.
  • This message includes notifying 5GC1 that it has successfully established some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session2, successfully reconfiguring related radio resources on the MN side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
  • the MN can also provide data forwarding (Data Forwarding) transmission address information in the above message for some of the returned QoS Flows.
  • 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from the MN, learns that the MN side has successfully established some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session2, and sends a secondary base station modification command (SN MODIFICATION COMMAND) message to SN-gNB1.
  • the message includes the result of notifying SN-gNB1 to continue to maintain the available S-UE capabilities after the dual-connection operation is updated, and to successfully return part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session 2 to the MN side. Then SN-gNB1 deletes part of the QoS Flows and related radio resources in the returned PDU Session2, as well as the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
  • the MN and the P-UE continue to maintain the P-RL radio link through the RRC reconfiguration message, and then continue to transmit PDU Session1 user service data and part of the returned PDU Session2 user service data.
  • SN-gNB1 and S-UE continue to maintain the S-RL radio link through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then continue to transmit part of the remaining PDU and Session2 user service data.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the device can be set in the core network element.
  • the device may include: a first sending module 71, configured to send a first indication message to the target secondary base station, where the first indication message includes a secondary message between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
  • the first receiving module 72 is configured to receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, the first response message Includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
  • the device further includes: a second receiving module 73, configured to receive a first demand message from the primary base station, where the first demand message is that the primary base station detects Sent when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations changes, the first demand message includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the first demand information It includes required information for the establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • a second receiving module 73 configured to receive a first demand message from the primary base station, where the first demand message is that the primary base station detects Sent when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations changes, the first demand message includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the first demand information It includes required information for the establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
  • the device further includes: a second sending module 74, configured to send a second indication message to the primary base station when the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful, and the second The instruction message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
  • a second sending module 74 configured to send a second indication message to the primary base station when the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful, and the second The instruction message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
  • the device further includes: a third receiving module 75, configured to receive a second demand message from a target secondary base station, where the second demand message is when the target secondary base station detects the target terminal Sent when the wireless connection status with multiple base stations changes, the second demand message includes second demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the second demand information includes
  • the third sending module 76 is configured to send a third instruction message to the primary base station, where the third instruction message includes the primary connection command information corresponding to the second demand information;
  • the fourth receiving module 77 is configured to receive a second response message from the main base station, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the main connection command information.
  • the first indication message is a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message
  • the first indication information includes the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need for offloading User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
  • the first indication message is a secondary base station modification request message
  • the first indication information includes user service feature information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re-distributed to the target secondary base station.
  • User service characteristic information is a secondary base station modification request message
  • the first indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message
  • the first indication information includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message
  • the first demand message includes remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the second indication message is a secondary base station setup command message or a secondary base station add command message
  • the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
  • the second indication message is a secondary base station modification command message
  • the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
  • the second indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message
  • the second indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
  • the second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station
  • the third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message
  • the third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service feature information that needs to be returned to the primary base station
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message
  • the first The indication message includes the available auxiliary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
  • the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted;
  • the third indication message is the secondary base station release command message or the secondary base station delete command message.
  • the third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the remaining users on the target secondary base station that need to be returned to the primary base station Service characteristic information;
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of the application.
  • the device can be set in the network element of the access network.
  • the apparatus may include: a fifth receiving module 81, configured to receive a first indication message from a core network element, where the first indication message includes a secondary base station and a target terminal. First instruction information for the connection to perform a specified operation, where the specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification or deletion; an execution module 82, configured to perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal
  • the fifth sending module 83 is configured to send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
  • the device further includes: a sixth sending module 84, configured to send notification to the target terminal when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed
  • the core network element sends a first demand message, the first demand message includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the first demand message includes the establishment and addition of the secondary connection. , Modification, deletion or release requirements.
  • the device further includes: a sixth receiving module 85, configured to receive a second indication message from the core network element, where the second indication message is when the core network element is located at all
  • the first result information indicates that it is sent when the specified operation is successful, and the second indication message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
  • the device further includes: a seventh sending module 86, configured to send the first sending module to the core network element when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and the multiple base stations has changed.
  • a seventh sending module 86 configured to send the first sending module to the core network element when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and the multiple base stations has changed.
  • the second demand message includes second demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the second demand information includes a demand for modification, deletion, or release of the secondary connection.
  • the device further includes: a seventh receiving module 87, configured to receive a third indication message from the core network element, where the third indication message includes information corresponding to the second demand information
  • the eighth sending module 88 is configured to send a second response message to the core network element, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the main connection command information.
  • the first indication message is a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message
  • the first indication information includes the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need for offloading User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
  • the first indication message is a secondary base station modification request message
  • the first indication information includes user service feature information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re-distributed to the target secondary base station.
  • User service characteristic information is a secondary base station modification request message
  • the first indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message
  • the first indication information includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or secondary base station addition demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station .
  • the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message
  • the first demand message includes remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  • the second indication message is a secondary base station setup command message or a secondary base station add command message
  • the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
  • the second indication message is a secondary base station modification command message
  • the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
  • the second indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message
  • the second indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
  • the second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message
  • the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station
  • the third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station;
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
  • the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted;
  • the third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message.
  • the third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the remaining users on the target secondary base station that need to be returned to the primary base station Service characteristic information;
  • the first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
  • the execution module is further configured to establish an auxiliary connection with the target terminal according to the available auxiliary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target auxiliary base station, The user service is offloaded to the target secondary base station, so that the target secondary base station continues to carry the transmission.
  • the execution module is also used to delete user service bearer transmission resources that need to be returned from the target secondary base station, or allocate new bearer transmission resources for re-offloaded user services.
  • the execution module is further configured to delete the remaining user service bearer transmission resources from the target secondary base station, and release or delete the target secondary base station.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the network device 130 provided by an embodiment of the present application includes a memory 1303 and a processor 1304.
  • the network device 130 may further include an interface 1301 and a bus 1302.
  • the interface 1301, the memory 1303 and the processor 1304 are connected through a bus 1302.
  • the memory 1303 is used to store instructions.
  • the processor 1304 is configured to read the instructions to execute the technical solutions of the foregoing method embodiments applied to an access network element.
  • the implementation principles and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • a network device 140 provided by an embodiment of this application includes a memory 1403 and a processor 1404.
  • the network device may also include an interface 1401 and a bus 1402.
  • the interface 1401, the memory 1403 and the processor 1404 are connected through a bus 1402.
  • the memory 1403 is used to store instructions.
  • the processor 1404 is configured to read the instructions to execute the technical solutions of the foregoing method embodiments applied to core network elements. The implementation principles and technical effects are similar and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG. 25, the system includes: a network device 130 according to the above-mentioned embodiment and a network device 140 according to the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the present application provides a storage medium that stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the method in the foregoing embodiment is implemented.
  • the various embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or dedicated circuits, software, logic or any combination thereof.
  • some aspects may be implemented in hardware, while other aspects may be implemented in firmware or software that may be executed by a controller, microprocessor or other computing device, although the application is not limited thereto.
  • Computer program instructions can be assembly instructions, instruction set architecture (ISA) instructions, machine instructions, machine-related instructions, microcode, firmware instructions, state setting data, or source code written in any combination of one or more programming languages or Target code.
  • ISA instruction set architecture
  • the block diagram of any logical flow in the drawings of the present application may represent program steps, or may represent interconnected logic circuits, modules, and functions, or may represent a combination of program steps and logic circuits, modules, and functions.
  • the computer program can be stored on the memory.
  • the memory can be of any type suitable for the local technical environment and can be implemented using any suitable data storage technology.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory, etc.
  • the volatile memory may be a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM can include many forms, such as static random access memory (Static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronization Dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access Memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM).
  • Static RAM, SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • Double data rate synchronization Dynamic random access memory Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be of any type suitable for the local technical environment, such as but not limited to general-purpose computers, special-purpose computers, microprocessors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processors, DSP), and application specific integrated circuits (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), Field-Programmable Gate Array (FGPA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, or processors based on multi-core processor architecture.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • the foregoing processor may implement or execute the steps of each method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.

Abstract

The present application provides a connecting method and apparatus, a network device, and a storage medium. The connecting method comprises: sending a first indication message to a target secondary base station, the first indication message comprising first indication information for performing a designated operation on a secondary connection between the target secondary base station and a target terminal, and the designated operation comprising establishment, addition, modification, deletion, and release; and receiving a first response message from the target secondary base station, the first response message comprising first result information corresponding to the first indication information.

Description

连接方法、装置、网络设备及存储介质Connection method, device, network equipment and storage medium
本申请要求在2019年04月03日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910267440.6的中国专利申请的优先权,该申请的全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office with an application number of 201910267440.6 on April 3, 2019. The entire content of the application is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,例如涉及连接方法、装置、网络设备及存储介质。This application relates to the field of communications, such as connection methods, devices, network equipment, and storage media.
背景技术Background technique
第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project,3GPP)第四代陆基(4Generation,4G)蜂窝移动通讯系统或称LTE(Long Term Evolution,长期演进)蜂窝移动通讯系统中包括:4G核心网EPC(Evolved Packet Core,演进分组核心网)和RAN(Radio Access Network,无线接入网络)。其中,4G EPC包括:MME(Mobility Management Entity,移动管理实体节点)、SGW(Serving Gateway,服务网关节点)、PGW(PDN Gateway,PDN网关节点)等基本网元节点。4G RAN包括:eNB(evolved Node B,长期演进型基站)和众多基站之间的接口。The third generation partnership project (3rd Generation Partnership Project, 3GPP) fourth generation land-based (4Generation, 4G) cellular mobile communication system or LTE (Long Term Evolution) cellular mobile communication system includes: 4G core network EPC (Evolved Packet Core, evolved packet core network) and RAN (Radio Access Network, radio access network). Among them, 4G EPC includes: MME (Mobility Management Entity, mobility management entity node), SGW (Serving Gateway, Serving Gateway node), PGW (PDN Gateway, PDN gateway node) and other basic network element nodes. 4G RAN includes: eNB (evolved Node B, long-term evolution base station) and the interface between many base stations.
4G之后的第五代陆基5G蜂窝移动通讯系统包括5GC(5Generation Core,第五代核心网)和NG-RAN(Next Generation Radio Access Network,下一代无线接入网络)。其中,5GC包括:AMF(Access Mobility Function,接入移动功能)节点、SMF(Session Management Function,会话管理功能)节点和UPF(User Plane Function,用户面功能)节点等网元节点。NG-RAN中至少包括:两种不同的RAT(Radio Access Technology,无线接入技术)制式类型的基站,即:基于4G eNB继续增强演进的ng-eNB和全新物理层空口设计的gNB基站。NG-RAN中还包括基站与相关网元实体之间的接口。其中,ng-eNB空口仍然支持E-UTRA(evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access,演进型通用陆地无线接入)RAT制式,gNB空口支持NR(New Radio,新无线)RAT制式。The fifth-generation land-based 5G cellular mobile communication system after 4G includes 5GC (5Generation Core, fifth-generation core network) and NG-RAN (Next Generation Radio Access Network, next-generation radio access network). Among them, 5GC includes: AMF (Access Mobility Function, access mobility function) node, SMF (Session Management Function, session management function) node, UPF (User Plane Function, user plane function) node and other network element nodes. NG-RAN includes at least two different RAT (Radio Access Technology) base stations, namely: ng-eNB based on 4G eNB continuous enhancement and evolution, and gNB base station designed with a new physical layer air interface. NG-RAN also includes interfaces between base stations and related network element entities. Among them, the ng-eNB air interface still supports the E-UTRA (evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access, evolved universal terrestrial radio access) RAT standard, and the gNB air interface supports the NR (New Radio, new radio) RAT standard.
在UE与接入网的多个基站同时连接进行数据传输的情况下,需要依赖主基站与核心网的接口以及主辅基站之间的Xn接口,进行各种双多连接操作相关信息的交互。但是,有些情况下,Xn接口连接不固定且鲁棒性相对不高,容易造成多连接不稳定或无法被配置操作等情况。When the UE is connected to multiple base stations of the access network at the same time for data transmission, it is necessary to rely on the interface between the primary base station and the core network and the Xn interface between the primary and secondary base stations to exchange information related to various dual-multiple connection operations. However, in some cases, the connection of the Xn interface is not fixed and the robustness is relatively low, which may easily cause multiple connections to be unstable or unable to be configured and operated.
发明内容Summary of the invention
为了解决上述至少一个技术问题,本申请实施例提供了以下方案。In order to solve at least one technical problem described above, embodiments of the present application provide the following solutions.
本申请实施例提供一种连接方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a connection method, including:
向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放;Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the designated operation includes Connection establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release;
接收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。Receiving a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
本申请实施例提供一种连接方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a connection method, including:
接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放;Receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the specified operation includes Connection establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release;
对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作;Performing the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal;
向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。Send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
本申请实施例提供一种连接装置,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides a connection device, including:
第一发送模块,用于向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改或删除;The first sending module is configured to send a first indication message to the target secondary base station, where the first indication message includes first indication information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and Specified operations include creation, addition, modification or deletion;
第一接收模块,用于接收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。The first receiving module is configured to receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
本申请实施例提供一种连接装置,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides a connection device, including:
第五接收模块,用于接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改或删除;The fifth receiving module is configured to receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and Specified operations include creation, addition, modification or deletion;
执行模块,用于对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作;An execution module, configured to execute the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal;
第五发送模块,用于向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应 消息中包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。The fifth sending module is configured to send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
本申请实施例提供一种网络设备,所述网络设备包括:处理器及存储器;An embodiment of the present application provides a network device, the network device includes: a processor and a memory;
所述存储器用于存储指令;The memory is used to store instructions;
所述处理器被配置为读取所述指令以执行本申请实施例任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to read the instruction to execute the method described in any one of the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例提供一种存储介质,所述存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现本申请实施例任一项所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a storage medium that stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the method described in any one of the embodiments of the present application is implemented.
本申请实施例能够直接指示目标辅基站对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作,有利于提高多连接操作的灵活性。The embodiments of the present application can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, which is beneficial to improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
关于本申请的以上实施例和其他方面以及其实现方式,在附图说明、具体实施方式和权利要求中提供更多说明。Regarding the above embodiments and other aspects of the present application and their implementation manners, more descriptions are provided in the description of the drawings, specific implementation manners, and claims.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为聚合式NG-RAN基站的架构图;Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of an aggregated NG-RAN base station;
图2为不同RAT制式的宏微小区部署的异构网络的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of heterogeneous networks deployed in macro and micro cells with different RAT standards;
图3为MN主控UE双连接操作的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the MN mastering the UE dual connection operation;
图4a和图4b为UE处于双连接模式的示意图;4a and 4b are schematic diagrams of the UE in dual connection mode;
图5a和图5b为卫星基站服务小区覆盖变化的示意图;Figures 5a and 5b are schematic diagrams of changes in the coverage of a satellite base station serving cell;
图6为卫星基站馈电链路建立维持的示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the establishment and maintenance of the feeder link of the satellite base station;
图7为本申请一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application;
图13为5GC主控UE进行双连接数据传输操作的架构图;Figure 13 is an architecture diagram of a 5GC mastering UE for dual-connection data transmission operations;
图14a为UE与卫星基站以及地面站双连接的应用示例的示意图;Fig. 14a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
图14b为MN发起添加流程的示意图;Figure 14b is a schematic diagram of the MN initiating an adding process;
图15a为UE与卫星基站以及地面站双连接的应用示例的示意图;Fig. 15a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
图15b为MN发起修改流程的示意图;Figure 15b is a schematic diagram of the MN initiating a modification process;
图16a为UE与卫星基站以及地面站双连接的应用示例的示意图;Fig. 16a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
图16b为MN发起删除流程的示意图;Figure 16b is a schematic diagram of the MN initiating a deletion process;
图17a为UE与卫星基站以及地面站双连接的应用示例的示意图;Fig. 17a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
图17b为5GC发起添加流程的示意图;Figure 17b is a schematic diagram of the 5GC initiating and adding process;
图18a为UE与卫星基站以及地面站双连接的应用示例的示意图;Fig. 18a is a schematic diagram of an application example of dual connection between a UE and a satellite base station and a ground station;
图18b为SN发起修改流程的示意图;Figure 18b is a schematic diagram of the SN initiated modification process;
图19为本申请一实施例提供的连接装置的结构示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图20为本申请另一实施例提供的连接装置的结构示意图;20 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of this application;
图21为本申请另一实施例提供的连接装置的结构示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of this application;
图22为本申请另一实施例提供的连接装置的结构示意图;FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of this application;
图23为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图24为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图25为本申请实施例提供的通信系统结构示意图。FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下文中将结合附图对本申请的实施例进行详细说明。需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本申请中的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互任意组合。Hereinafter, the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the embodiments in this application and the features in the embodiments can be combined with each other arbitrarily if there is no conflict.
图1为聚合式(Aggregated)NG-RAN基站的架构图。如图1所示,众多NG-RAN基站(例如gNB或ng-eNB等)通过标准化的NG接口和5GC相互连接。例如,包括NG-C控制面(信令)连接和NG-U用户面(用户数据)连接。NG-RAN基站(gNB或ng-eNB)之间通过Xn接口相互连接(包括Xn-C控制面连接和Xn-U用户面连接)。上述接口的控制面连接用于传输网元节点之间的控制信令消息,如NGAP(Next Generation Application Protocol,下一代应用协议)、XnAP协议流程消息。用户面连接用于传输用户业务数据(包/帧/块)等。NGAP,XnAP分别为NG-C、Xn-C控制面逻辑网络应用层协议,基于下层承载传输(流控制传输协议(Stream Control Transmission Protocol,SCTP)连接)来传输对应接口上的控制信令流程消息。NG-U、Xn-U用户面接口用户业务数据,基于下层承载传输(例如GTP-U隧道)来传输对应接口上的用户业务数据。NG-RAN基站 和被服务终端UE之间通过Uu空口(即无线空中接口)相互连接。Uu空口包括多条空口控制面信令无线承载SRB(Signaling Radio Bearer)和多条空口用户面数据无线承载DRB(Data Radio Bearer)。Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of an Aggregated NG-RAN base station. As shown in Figure 1, many NG-RAN base stations (such as gNB or ng-eNB, etc.) are connected to each other through a standardized NG interface and 5GC. For example, including NG-C control plane (signaling) connection and NG-U user plane (user data) connection. NG-RAN base stations (gNB or ng-eNB) are connected to each other via Xn interfaces (including Xn-C control plane connection and Xn-U user plane connection). The control plane connection of the above interface is used to transmit control signaling messages between network element nodes, such as NGAP (Next Generation Application Protocol) and XnAP protocol process messages. The user plane connection is used to transmit user service data (packet/frame/block), etc. NGAP and XnAP are respectively NG-C and Xn-C control plane logic network application layer protocols, which are based on the lower layer bearer transmission (Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) connection) to transmit control signaling process messages on the corresponding interface . NG-U, Xn-U user plane interface user service data, based on the lower layer bearer transmission (such as GTP-U tunnel) to transmit the user service data on the corresponding interface. The NG-RAN base station and the served terminal UE are connected to each other through the Uu air interface (i.e., wireless air interface). The Uu air interface includes multiple air interface control plane signaling radio bearer (SRB) and multiple air interface user plane data radio bearer (DRB).
在传统的陆基地面蜂窝移动系统中,各种基站的部署一旦站址确定,相对于地面特定经纬度的物理位置,都是相对静止且固定不动的。因此,各个NG-RAN基站所提供的空口Uu服务小区(Serving Cell)的无线覆盖/容量(Coverage and Capacity)的配置和供给,以及连接这些NG-RAN相邻基站的NG、Xn接口实例等,也都是相对物理位置固定不变的。比如:NG、Xn等接口连接的承载传输,大部分都是通过宽带光纤等固网传输方式去实现的,因此,网络侧接口连接的鲁棒性、延时性、信令和数据传输效率性等方面都是比较好的。这种相对静止固定式的陆基地面蜂窝移动网络,便于运营商的规划部署和RRM(Radio Resource Management,无线资源管理)。如图2所示,在宏微服务小区混合部署的异构大网络中,可能存在着不同RAT制式,不同载波频点和工作带宽,不同无线覆盖能力的各种类型基站,如:4G legacy eNB、5G gNB、ng-eNB、WLAN AP(Wireless Local Area Networks Access Point,无线局域网接入点)等网元节点,它们彼此之间能够进行交互操作。In the traditional land-based ground cellular mobile system, once the deployment of various base stations is determined, the physical location relative to a specific latitude and longitude on the ground is relatively static and fixed. Therefore, the configuration and provision of radio coverage/capacity (Coverage and Capacity) of the air interface Uu serving cell (Serving Cell) provided by each NG-RAN base station, as well as the NG and Xn interface examples connecting these NG-RAN neighboring base stations, etc., The relative physical location is also fixed. For example, most of the bearer transmission of interface connections such as NG and Xn are implemented through fixed network transmission methods such as broadband optical fibers. Therefore, the robustness, delay, signaling and data transmission efficiency of the network side interface connection The other aspects are relatively good. This relatively static and fixed land-based ground cellular mobile network is convenient for operators' planning and deployment and RRM (Radio Resource Management, radio resource management). As shown in Figure 2, in a heterogeneous large network with mixed deployment of macro and micro service cells, there may be various types of base stations with different RAT standards, different carrier frequencies and operating bandwidths, and different wireless coverage capabilities, such as: 4G legacy eNB , 5G gNB, ng-eNB, WLAN AP (Wireless Local Area Networks Access Point, wireless local area network access point) and other network element nodes, they can interact with each other.
5G系统支持终端UE处于SC(Single Connectivity,单连接)和DC/MC(Dual/Multiple Connectivity,双/多连接)工作模式。其中,多连接是双连接的逻辑维度拓展,下面将以双连接DC叙述为主。在SC单连接工作模式下,UE在空口Uu和网络侧只有一条信令或数据传输通道,称为无线链路RL(Radio Link)。在DC/MC(双/多)连接工作模式下,UE在空口和网络侧有两条或者以上个数的信令或数据传输通道,即多条相对独立的RL。在NG-RAN主控锚点主基站的RRC(Radio Resource Control,无线资源控制)控制下,多条空口信令无线承载SRB和数据无线承载DRB能在上述双/多条RL上被配置和使用。如图3所示,在某个特定物理区域内,MN(Master Node,主基站)通常用来提供无线宏覆盖。在局部热点或弱覆盖的区域,众多SN(Secondary Node,辅基站)用来提供增强的无线微覆盖,以提升蜂窝异构网络的总体无线容量和性能。The 5G system supports the terminal UE in SC (Single Connectivity, single connection) and DC/MC (Dual/Multiple Connectivity, dual/multiple connection) working modes. Among them, multi-connection is the logical dimension expansion of dual-connection, and the description of dual-connection DC will be the main description below. In the SC single connection working mode, the UE has only one signaling or data transmission channel on the air interface Uu and the network side, which is called a radio link (RL). In the DC/MC (dual/multiple) connection working mode, the UE has two or more signaling or data transmission channels on the air interface and the network side, that is, multiple relatively independent RLs. Under the control of RRC (Radio Resource Control) of the NG-RAN main control anchor main base station, multiple air interface signaling radio bearer SRB and data radio bearer DRB can be configured and used on the above dual/multiple RLs . As shown in Figure 3, in a specific physical area, MN (Master Node) is usually used to provide wireless macro coverage. In local hotspots or areas with weak coverage, many SNs (Secondary Nodes) are used to provide enhanced wireless micro coverage to improve the overall wireless capacity and performance of cellular heterogeneous networks.
以5G相关协议支持的MR-DC(Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity,多无线双连 接)工作模式为例,面向特定终端UE对象,当UE同时处于MN主服务小区和SN辅服务小区的重叠覆盖区域内之时,在主基站MN的主控之下,MN和5GC之间会有NG-C和NG-U接口连接,MN和SN之间会有Xn-C和Xn-U接口连接,但SN和5GC之间只能有NG-U连接。因此,UE进入、退出和在双连接工作模式之内的所有基本操作,都由主基站MN主控来完成。主基站MN基于UE针对空口不断变化无线条件的RRM测量上报,以及主基站本地自身的RRM算法条件等,主控和决策着MN和5GC、SN、UE之间的双连接配置、工作状态、无线传输等资源协同等。SN和5GC、UE之间的大部分控制面操作都通过Xn-C接口连接,由MN节点转发来完成。在图4a和图4b中,用虚线表示网元节点之间的控制面连接,用点划线表示网元节点之间的用户面连接。图4a为SN终止(Terminated)承载类型,聚焦到网元节点MN/SN和UPF节点(可以简称UPF)之间,有如下两种NG-U接口数据传输通道。第一种通道是NG-U(MN)提供的UPF和MN之间的数据传输通道,用于传输MN侧PDU(Protocol Data Unit,协议数据单元)Session(会话)/QoS(Quality of Service,服务质量)Flows(流)上承载的上下行数据包。这条通道的建立需要UPF提供“MN侧上行数据传输通道地址”和MN提供“MN侧下行数据传输通道地址”。类似地,第二种通道是NG-U(SN)提供的UPF和SN之间的数据传输通道,用于传输SN侧PDU Session/QoS Flows上承载的上下行数据包。这条通道的建立需要UPF提供“SN侧上行数据传输通道地址”和SN提供“SN侧下行数据传输通道地址”。对于SN Terminated承载类型,MN和SN之间无需建立和维护Xn-U接口承载,因为所有的用户业务数据流是独立发生在UPF和各个主辅基站之间的。图4b为MN Terminated承载类型,聚焦到MN和UPF之间,有如下一种NG-U接口数据传输通道:NG-U(MN)提供了UPF和MN之间的数据传输通道。但SN和UPF之间没有NG-U接口数据传输通道。与图4a相比,图4b没有任何NG-U(SN)通道。对于MN Terminated承载类型,为了能使用SN侧无线资源辅助传输,MN和SN之间需建立和维护Xn-U承载,因为所有的用户业务数据流需发生在MN和SN之间。总之,已支持的双/多连接操作,必须依赖MN和SN之间的Xn-C接口,参与到双/多连接操作的多个主辅基站都依赖它进行彼此间 资源配置和工作状态的协同和更新。Take the MR-DC (Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity) working mode supported by 5G related protocols as an example, for specific terminal UE objects, when the UE is in the overlapping coverage area of the MN primary serving cell and SN secondary serving cell at the same time At this time, under the control of the main base station MN, there will be NG-C and NG-U interface connections between MN and 5GC, and Xn-C and Xn-U interfaces will be connected between MN and SN, but SN and There can only be NG-U connection between 5GC. Therefore, all basic operations of the UE entering, exiting, and in the dual-connection working mode are completed by the master base station MN. The main base station MN is based on the UE's RRM measurement report for the constantly changing radio conditions of the air interface, as well as the local RRM algorithm conditions of the main base station. Coordination of resources such as transmission. Most of the control plane operations between SN, 5GC, and UE are connected through the Xn-C interface and forwarded by the MN node. In Figures 4a and 4b, the dashed line represents the control plane connection between the network element nodes, and the dotted line represents the user plane connection between the network element nodes. Figure 4a shows the SN terminated (Terminated) bearer type, focusing on the network element node MN/SN and the UPF node (may be referred to as UPF). There are the following two NG-U interface data transmission channels. The first channel is the data transmission channel between UPF and MN provided by NG-U (MN), which is used to transmit MN-side PDU (Protocol Data Unit) Session (session)/QoS (Quality of Service) Quality) The uplink and downlink data packets carried on Flows. The establishment of this channel requires UPF to provide "MN side uplink data transmission channel address" and MN to provide "MN side downlink data transmission channel address". Similarly, the second channel is the data transmission channel between UPF and SN provided by NG-U (SN), which is used to transmit the uplink and downlink data packets carried on the SN-side PDU Session/QoS Flows. The establishment of this channel requires UPF to provide "SN side uplink data transmission channel address" and SN to provide "SN side downlink data transmission channel address". For the SN Terminated bearer type, there is no need to establish and maintain the Xn-U interface bearer between the MN and the SN, because all user service data flows occur independently between the UPF and each primary and secondary base station. Figure 4b shows the MN Terminated bearer type, focusing on the MN and UPF. There is the following NG-U interface data transmission channel: NG-U (MN) provides a data transmission channel between UPF and MN. But there is no NG-U interface data transmission channel between SN and UPF. Compared with Figure 4a, Figure 4b does not have any NG-U (SN) channels. For the MN Terminated bearer type, in order to use the SN side radio resources to assist transmission, an Xn-U bearer needs to be established and maintained between the MN and the SN, because all user service data flows need to occur between the MN and the SN. In short, the supported dual/multiple connection operation must rely on the Xn-C interface between the MN and SN, and multiple primary and secondary base stations participating in the dual/multiple connection operation rely on it to coordinate resource configuration and working status with each other. And update.
随着各类可移动式基站或网元节点的出现,比如:地面车载移动式基站、空中无人机基站、卫星基站等,这些移动式基站所提供的空口服务小区的无线覆盖/容量的供给,通常会随着移动式基站的物理位置移动而不断地变化。这些变化或周期有规律或无任何规律。连接这些移动式基站的NG,Xn等接口的承载传输,也不能再是传统固定固网传输方式。因此,无法通过宽带光纤等固网方式去承载传输,通常依赖无线承载方式,如:微波、激光等中继技术手段。这种由众多移动式基站构建成的蜂窝移动网络,虽然在部署方面更加的灵活(无需固定的站址资源),但网络资源和网元节点间的承载传输只能通过相对动态的方式去规划和管理更新。否则随着各个基站或网元节点的移动,网络拓扑或环境条件会不断地发生变化,原来的旧网元接口连接和配置可能失效,而新的网元接口连接和配置有待建立和维护。如图5a和图5b所示:有若干个天基的卫星基站Moving node1/2/3/4……,它们各自从空中向地面特定覆盖区域,提供一个卫星服务波束Beam,分别形成地面服务小区1/2/3/4的“小椭圆的”覆盖。但随着这些卫星基站沿着轨道集体地向左移动,它们各自提供的地面服务小区1/2/3/4……的覆盖也随着卫星基站一起向左,或连续地或跳跃式地移动。假设地面同时还有个主基站MN提供着“大椭圆的”无线覆盖,那么和图3的主要不同点在于:卫星基站提供的“小椭圆”覆盖和地面MN基站提供的“大椭圆”覆盖之间的相对位置关系会动态地变化。此外,卫星基站和地面基站之间也可能无法建立较稳定的Xn接口连接,否则需不停地进行Xn接口连接的建立、删除、建立、删除……,从而需要不断地更新和维护。With the emergence of various types of mobile base stations or network element nodes, such as ground vehicle mobile base stations, aerial drone base stations, satellite base stations, etc., the wireless coverage/capacity supply of air interface service cells provided by these mobile base stations , Which usually changes continuously as the physical location of the mobile base station moves. These changes or cycles are regular or without any regularity. The bearer transmission of interfaces such as NG and Xn connecting these mobile base stations can no longer be the traditional fixed fixed network transmission method. Therefore, it is impossible to carry the transmission through fixed network methods such as broadband optical fiber, and usually rely on wireless carrying methods, such as: microwave, laser and other relay technology means. This cellular mobile network constructed by many mobile base stations is more flexible in deployment (no fixed site resources are required), but the network resources and the bearer transmission between network element nodes can only be planned in a relatively dynamic way And management updates. Otherwise, as each base station or network element node moves, network topology or environmental conditions will continue to change, the original interface connection and configuration of the old network element may fail, and the new network element interface connection and configuration need to be established and maintained. As shown in Figure 5a and Figure 5b: There are several space-based satellite base stations Moving node1/2/3/4......, each of which provides a satellite service beam from the air to a specific coverage area on the ground to form a ground service cell. 1/2/3/4 "small oval" coverage. But as these satellite base stations collectively move to the left along the orbit, the coverage of their respective ground service cells 1/2/3/4...... also moves to the left along with the satellite base stations, or continuously or hoppingly. . Assuming that there is also a main base station MN on the ground that provides "large ellipse" wireless coverage, the main difference from Figure 3 is: the "small ellipse" coverage provided by the satellite base station and the "large ellipse" coverage provided by the ground MN base station. The relative positional relationship between will change dynamically. In addition, a relatively stable Xn interface connection may not be established between the satellite base station and the ground base station. Otherwise, the establishment, deletion, establishment, and deletion of the Xn interface connection need to be continuously performed, which requires continuous updating and maintenance.
终端UE和卫星基站这一段的无线链路通常称为Service link(服务链路),它面向被服务的UE,直接承载着5G NR Uu空口上的用户业务数据和RRC信令。从单个用户终端UE的角度看,即使UE处于原地位置不动,但随着卫星基站的不断移动,UE的Service link也会发生相应的变更。如图6所示,卫星基站和服务地面站的无线链路通常称为Feeder link(馈电链路),它用于进一步连接Service link和地面核心网之间的E2E(End to End,端到端)连接,从而实现UE和地面网络之间的控制信令和用户数据传输。其中,服务地面站可以包括卫星地面 网关NTN-GW(Non-Terrestrial Networks Gateway,非地面网络网关)、核心网等集中控制网元节点。Feeder link至少需要提供卫星基站和地面核心网5GC之间的传输功能。如果卫星基站是一个完整的gNB,那么Feeder link需为NG接口提供稳定的传输服务,即可靠地传输NGAP控制信令流程消息和NG-U用户业务数据。虽然卫星基站一直在高速地移动,但通常默认它们和地面网关NTN-GW之间的Feeder link能够做到足够鲁棒。因此,可以建立相对稳定的NG接口连接实例,通过地面多个NTN-GW传输层路由多跳和中继的方式,无需频繁的进行NG接口实例的更新维护。如图6中,当卫星基站Moving Node1从地面站2的管辖区域,逐渐向左移动到地面站3的管辖区域内之时,通过地面站2和地面站3之间的地面传输中继,可以默认卫星基站和地面核心网锚点网元之间的NG接口实例维持不变。因此,不需删除旧的NG接口连接而再重建新的NG接口连接,如此周而复始。The radio link between the terminal UE and the satellite base station is usually called the Service link, which faces the served UE and directly carries user service data and RRC signaling on the 5G NR Uu air interface. From the perspective of a single user terminal UE, even if the UE is in the same location, as the satellite base station continues to move, the service link of the UE will change accordingly. As shown in Figure 6, the wireless link between the satellite base station and the service ground station is usually called the Feeder link, which is used to further connect the E2E (End to End) between the service link and the ground core network. End) connection, so as to realize the control signaling and user data transmission between the UE and the ground network. Among them, the serving ground station may include a satellite ground gateway NTN-GW (Non-Terrestrial Networks Gateway), a core network, and other centralized control network element nodes. Feeder link at least needs to provide the transmission function between the satellite base station and the ground core network 5GC. If the satellite base station is a complete gNB, the Feeder link needs to provide a stable transmission service for the NG interface, that is, reliable transmission of NGAP control signaling process messages and NG-U user service data. Although satellite base stations have been moving at high speed, it is usually assumed that the feeder link between them and the terrestrial gateway NTN-GW can be robust enough. Therefore, a relatively stable NG interface connection instance can be established, and multiple NTN-GW transport layers on the ground can be routed and relayed through multiple hops and relays without frequent update and maintenance of the NG interface instance. As shown in Figure 6, when the satellite base station Moving Node1 gradually moves to the left from the jurisdiction of the ground station 2 to the jurisdiction of the ground station 3, through the ground transmission relay between the ground station 2 and the ground station 3, you can The default instance of the NG interface between the satellite base station and the anchor network element of the ground core network remains unchanged. Therefore, there is no need to delete the old NG interface connection and rebuild the new NG interface connection, and so on.
上述终端UE双/多连接操作的特点包括主辅基站物理位置固定、Xn接口连接固定且相对鲁棒好、MN主控等。卫星基站为代表的移动式基站部署工作的特点包括卫星基站有规律周期地沿着轨道移动、Xn接口连接不固定且鲁棒性相对不高等。综合UE双/多连接操作的特点和移动式基站部署工作的特点,如果UE需在地面固定基站和移动式卫星基站之间做双/多连接操作(简称:地空双/多连接),由于不能依赖主辅基站之间的Xn接口,可以依赖于相对更稳态的NG接口进行。The characteristics of the above-mentioned terminal UE dual/multiple connection operation include the fixed physical location of the primary and secondary base stations, the fixed and relatively robust Xn interface connection, and the MN master control. The characteristics of the deployment of mobile base stations represented by satellite base stations include satellite base stations moving regularly and periodically along the orbit, and the Xn interface connection is not fixed and the robustness is relatively low. Combining the characteristics of UE dual/multiple connection operation and the characteristics of mobile base station deployment, if the UE needs to perform dual/multiple connection operation between the ground fixed base station and the mobile satellite base station (abbreviation: ground-air dual/multiple connection), because It cannot rely on the Xn interface between the primary and secondary base stations, but can rely on the relatively more stable NG interface.
本申请提供一种通过核心网5GC控制终端UE进行双/多连接数据传输操作的方法,不需建立和维护主辅基站之间的Xn接口连接(无Xn-C或Xn-U接口连接)。其中,5GC和主辅基站有各自独立的NG接口连接,同时通过NG-C和NG-U接口连接。本申请相关的用户面承载与图4a的SN Terminated承载类型不同的是:辅基站SN和AMF/SMF之间也通过独立的NG-C接口连接,以实现5GC对SN的直接资源配置管理和工作协同等。This application provides a method for controlling the terminal UE to perform dual/multiple connection data transmission operations through the core network 5GC, without establishing and maintaining the Xn interface connection between the primary and secondary base stations (no Xn-C or Xn-U interface connection). Among them, 5GC and primary and secondary base stations have their own independent NG interface connection, and at the same time they are connected through NG-C and NG-U interfaces. The user plane bearer related to this application is different from the SN Terminated bearer type of Figure 4a: the secondary base station SN and AMF/SMF are also connected through an independent NG-C interface to realize the direct resource configuration management and work of the SN by the 5GC. Collaboration etc.
图7为本申请一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图。该方法可以应用于核心网侧。如图7所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by an embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the core network side. As shown in Figure 7, the method may include:
步骤S11、向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对所 述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息。所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放。Step S11: Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. The specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S12、接收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。Step S12: Receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
在一种实施方式中,可以由核心网网元发起对辅连接的指定操作。其中,核心网网元(例如5GC)可以感知到目标终端与多个接入网网元(例如基站)的无线连接状态是否发生变化。目标终端与多个基站的无线连接发生变化的示例可以包括:目标终端从单连接变成与多个基站连接,或者目标终端从与多个基站连接变成单连接,或者目标终端连接的基站数目发生变化,或者目标终端连接的基站发生变化,例如从与基站A、B连接变成与基站A、C连接等。In an embodiment, the network element of the core network may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection. Among them, the core network element (for example, 5GC) can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. Examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations may include: the target terminal changes from single connection to multiple base stations, or the target terminal changes from multiple base stations to single connection, or the number of base stations to which the target terminal is connected Change occurs, or the base station to which the target terminal is connected changes, for example, from connecting with base stations A and B to connecting with base stations A and C.
如果5GC感知到目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化,可以向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,从而对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行建立、添加、修改、删除或释放等操作。If the 5GC senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it can send a first indication message to the target secondary base station to establish, add, modify, delete, or delete the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. Release and other operations.
目标辅基站收到第一指示消息后,对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作。目标辅基站执行指定操作之后,可以向核心网网元发送第一响应消息,以通知核心网网元指定操作的执行是否成功。After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may send a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
以下分别介绍不同操作场景对应的第一指示消息和第一指示信息的类型和内容。The following respectively introduces the types and contents of the first indication message and the first indication information corresponding to different operation scenarios.
场景一:建立或添加场景。Scene 1: Create or add scenes.
在该场景中,所述第一指示消息可以为辅基站建立请求消息或辅基站添加请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first indication message may be a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message, and the first indication information includes the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to be offloaded to User service characteristic information of the target secondary base station.
场景二:修改场景。Scene 2: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一指示消息可以为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要从目标辅基站回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first indication message may be a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information includes user service feature information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or users who are re-distributed to the target secondary base station Business feature information.
场景三:释放或删除场景。Scene 3: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一指示消息可以为辅基站释放(release)命令消息或辅 基站删除(delete)命令消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first indication message may be a secondary base station release (release) command message or a secondary base station delete (delete) command message, and the first indication information includes the remaining user service features on the target secondary base station to be deleted information.
在本申请实施例中,可以将UE的整体无线链路能力分割为相对独立的多个部分。第一部分为主连接能力,第二部分为一个或多个辅连接能力。例如,用P-UE标识UE的主连接能力,用S-UE来标识辅连接能力。具体来说,可以对UE中的各种可共享属性的能力对象按特定的比例分割。例如:对UE内部可共享的RF(Radio Frequency,射频)和天线模块群、功放、Buffer(缓存)资源、基带处理器等硬件类资源进行分割。再如,UE支持的频段组合(Band Combination)信息,承载标识(RB id)等软件类资源进行分割。再如,对协议类资源、编码资源空间等进行分割。In the embodiment of the present application, the overall radio link capability of the UE may be divided into multiple relatively independent parts. The first part is the main connection capability, and the second part is one or more auxiliary connection capabilities. For example, P-UE is used to identify the primary connection capability of the UE, and S-UE is used to identify the secondary connection capability. Specifically, the capability objects of various shareable attributes in the UE can be divided according to a specific ratio. For example: segmentation of hardware resources such as RF (Radio Frequency) and antenna module group, power amplifier, Buffer (buffer) resources, baseband processor, etc. that can be shared within the UE. For another example, software resources such as band combination (Band Combination) information and bearer identifier (RB id) supported by the UE are divided. For another example, segmentation of protocol resources and coding resource space.
在本申请实施例中,目标终端的资源信息可以包括与目标终端建立辅连接需要使用的资源。例如,需要分流、回流或删除的用户业务为PDU会话1,则目标终端的资源信息可以包括与该PDU会话1相关的无线资源,还可以包括与辅基站相关的S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。In the embodiment of the present application, the resource information of the target terminal may include resources that need to be used to establish a secondary connection with the target terminal. For example, if the user service that needs to be offloaded, returned, or deleted is PDU session 1, the resource information of the target terminal may include radio resources related to PDU session 1, and may also include the control plane connected to the S-NG interface related to the secondary base station , User plane and transmission resources.
在本申请实施例中,指示信息中的用户业务特征信息可以包括用户业务的标识信息(如:PDU Session id)、承载配置信息(如:QoS Flow Level QoS Parameters)、数据前传的传输通道地址(如:UP Data Forwarding TNL Info)等。例如,如果需要分流、回流或删除的用户业务为PDU会话1,则用户业务的标识信息可以为PDU Session1,用户业务的承载配置信息可以包括PDU Session1中所有的QoS Flows相关的QoS配置参数,数据前传的传输通道地址可以为PDU Session1做数据前传的PDU SessionTunnel隧道地址信息。In the embodiment of this application, the user service characteristic information in the indication information may include user service identification information (e.g. PDU Session id), bearer configuration information (e.g. QoS Flow Level QoS Parameters), and data forwarding transmission channel address ( Such as: UP Data Forwarding TNL Info) etc. For example, if the user service that needs to be offloaded, returned, or deleted is PDU Session 1, the identification information of the user service can be PDU Session 1, and the bearer configuration information of the user service can include all QoS Flows related QoS configuration parameters and data in PDU Session 1. The forwarding transmission channel address can be the PDU SessionTunnel tunnel address information for PDU Session1 as the data forwarding.
在一种实施方式中,在步骤S12之后,该方法还可以包括:In an embodiment, after step S12, the method may further include:
在所述第一结果信息表示指定操作成功的情况下,向所述主基站发送第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息中包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。When the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful, a second indication message is sent to the primary base station, where the second indication message includes the first result information and the information corresponding to the first result information Main connection command information.
与上述场景对应,第二指示消息和第二指示消息的的类型和内容分别示例如下:Corresponding to the above scenario, the types and contents of the second indication message and the second indication message are respectively as follows:
场景一:建立或添加场景。Scene 1: Create or add scenes.
在该场景中,所述第二指示消息可以为辅基站建立命令消息或辅基站添加命令消息,所述第二指示消息可以包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second indication message may be a secondary base station establishment command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
例如,在建立或添加场景中,第二指示消息中的第一结果信息可以包括目标辅基站已经利用UE的S-UE能力与UE建立了辅连接,已经分流到该目标辅基站的PDU会话等用户业务的特征信息等。与第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息可以包括UE当前的可用主连接能力和资源信息。第二指示消息可以指示主基站将分流到目标辅基站的PDU会话等用户业务的特征信息从主基站删除,还可以指示主基站从利用完整的UE能力和资源与UE建立主连接,更新为利用UE的P-UE能力和资源与UE建立主连接。For example, in an establishment or addition scenario, the first result information in the second indication message may include that the target secondary base station has established a secondary connection with the UE by using the UE's S-UE capability, and the PDU session that has been offloaded to the target secondary base station, etc. Characteristic information of user services, etc. The main connection command information corresponding to the first result information may include the current available main connection capability and resource information of the UE. The second indication message can instruct the primary base station to delete the characteristic information of user services such as PDU sessions offloaded to the target secondary base station from the primary base station. It can also instruct the primary base station to use the complete UE capabilities and resources to establish a primary connection with the UE and update it to use The UE's P-UE capabilities and resources establish a primary connection with the UE.
场景二:修改场景。Scene 2: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二指示消息可以为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第二指示消息可以包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second instruction message may be a secondary base station modification command message, and the second instruction message may include available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
例如,在修改场景中,第二指示消息中的第一结果信息可以包括需要回流到主基站或已经分流到该目标辅基站的PDU会话等用户业务的特征信息。与第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息可以包括UE当前的可用主连接能力和资源信息。第二指示消息可以指示主基站将分流到目标辅基站的PDU会话等用户业务的特征信息从主基站删除,并在主基站添加需要回流的用户业务的特征信息,还可以指示主基站利用UE的当前可用的P-UE能力和资源,更新与UE之间的主连接。For example, in a modification scenario, the first result information in the second indication message may include characteristic information of user services such as PDU sessions that need to be returned to the primary base station or have been offloaded to the target secondary base station. The main connection command information corresponding to the first result information may include the current available main connection capability and resource information of the UE. The second indication message can instruct the primary base station to delete the characteristic information of user services such as PDU sessions that are offloaded to the target secondary base station from the primary base station, and add the characteristic information of user services that need to be returned to the primary base station. It can also instruct the primary base station to use the UE’s Currently available P-UE capabilities and resources, update the primary connection with the UE.
场景三:释放或删除场景。Scene 3: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二指示消息可以为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第二指示消息可以包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second indication message may be a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
例如,在释放或删除场景中,第二指示消息中的第一结果信息可以包括需要回流到主基站的该目标辅基站上剩余的PDU会话等用户业务的特征信息。与第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息可以包括UE当前的可用主连接能力和资 源信息。第二指示消息可以指示从该目标辅基站删除的PDU会话等用户业务的特征信息回流到主基站。如果将所有的辅基站释放,从多连接到单连接的情况,第二指示消息可以指示主基站重新利用完整的UE能力和资源与UE建立主连接。For example, in a release or deletion scenario, the first result information in the second indication message may include characteristic information of user services such as remaining PDU sessions on the target secondary base station that needs to be returned to the primary base station. The main connection command information corresponding to the first result information may include the current available main connection capability and resource information of the UE. The second indication message may indicate that the characteristic information of the user service such as the PDU session deleted from the target secondary base station is returned to the primary base station. If all the secondary base stations are released from multiple connections to single connections, the second indication message can instruct the primary base station to re-use the complete UE capabilities and resources to establish a primary connection with the UE.
在本申请实施例中,用户业务特征信息可以包括用户业务的标识信息、承载配置信息、数据前传的传输通道地址等。例如,第一需求信息中的用户业务特征信息包括用户业务的标识信息。第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的用户业务特征信息包括用户业务的承载配置信息、数据前传的传输通道地址等。In the embodiment of the present application, the user service characteristic information may include user service identification information, bearer configuration information, and transmission channel address for data forwarding. For example, the user service characteristic information in the first demand information includes identification information of the user service. The user service characteristic information in the first indication information and the second indication information includes the bearer configuration information of the user service, the transmission channel address of the data forwarding, and the like.
本实施例能够通过核心网网元直接指示目标辅基站对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作,无需依赖基站间交互,指示主辅基站更新与目标终端的主连接,有利于提高多连接操作的灵活性。This embodiment can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform designated operations on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal through the core network element, without relying on the interaction between the base stations, and instruct the primary and secondary base stations to update the primary connection with the target terminal, which is beneficial to Improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
图8为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图。该方法可以应用于核心网侧。如图8所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the core network side. As shown in Figure 8, the method may include:
步骤S21、接收来自主基站的第一需求消息,所述第一需求消息是所述主基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下发送的,所述第一需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第一需求信息。其中,所述第一需求信息包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放的需求信息。Step S21: Receive a first demand message from a primary base station, the first demand message being sent by the primary base station upon detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, and the first demand message A demand message includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the auxiliary connection. Wherein, the first demand information includes demand information for the establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S22、向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息。所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放。Step S22: Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. The specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S23、接收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。Step S23: Receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
在一种实施方式中,可以由主基站发起对辅连接的指定操作。主基站可以感知到目标终端与多个接入网网元(例如基站)的无线连接状态是否发生变化。目标终端与多个基站的无线连接发生变化的示例可以参见上述实施例的相关描述。如果主基站感知到目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化,可以向核心网网元发送第一需求消息。由核心网网元向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息。 目标辅基站收到第一指示消息后,对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行建立、添加、修改、删除或释放等指定操作。目标辅基站执行指定操作之后,可以向核心网网元返回第一响应消息,以通知核心网网元指定操作的执行是否成功。In an implementation manner, the primary base station may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection. The primary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment. If the primary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it can send the first demand message to the core network element. The core network element sends the first indication message to the target secondary base station. After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs designated operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
以下分别介绍不同操作场景对应的第一需求消息的类型和内容。The following respectively introduces the type and content of the first demand message corresponding to different operation scenarios.
场景一:建立或添加场景。Scene 1: Create or add scenes.
在该场景中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站建立需求消息或辅基站添加需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
场景二:修改场景。Scene 2: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
场景三:释放或删除场景。Scene 3: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the first demand message includes the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
相应地,在上述场景中的第一指示消息和第一响应消息的类型和内容可以参见上述实施例的相关描述,在此不赘述。Correspondingly, the type and content of the first indication message and the first response message in the above scenario can refer to the related description of the above embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在一种实施方式中,在步骤S23之后,该方法还可以包括:In an embodiment, after step S23, the method may further include:
在所述第一结果信息表示指定操作成功的情况下,向所述主基站发送第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息中包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。例如,在对辅连接执行建立、添加、修改、删除或释放等操作成功的情况下,5GC可以向主基站发送第二指示信息。第二指示消息的类型和内容可以参见上述实施例的相关描述,在此不赘述。When the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful, a second indication message is sent to the primary base station, where the second indication message includes the first result information and the information corresponding to the first result information Main connection command information. For example, in the case where operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection are successful, the 5GC may send the second indication information to the primary base station. For the type and content of the second indication message, reference may be made to the related description of the foregoing embodiment, which is not repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,用户业务特征信息可以包括用户业务的标识信息、承载配置信息、数据前传的传输通道地址等。例如,第二需求信息中的用户业务特征信息包括用户业务的标识信息。第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的用户业务特征信息包括用户业务的承载配置信息、数据前传的传输通道地址等。In the embodiment of the present application, the user service characteristic information may include user service identification information, bearer configuration information, and transmission channel address for data forwarding. For example, the user service characteristic information in the second requirement information includes identification information of the user service. The user service characteristic information in the first indication information and the second indication information includes the bearer configuration information of the user service, the transmission channel address of the data forwarding, and the like.
本实施例在收到主基站的需求信息后,能够通过核心网网元直接指示目标辅基站对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作,指示主辅基站更新与目标终端的主连接,无需依赖基站间交互,有利于提高多连接操作的灵活性。After receiving the demand information of the primary base station, this embodiment can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal through the core network element, and instruct the primary and secondary base station to update the primary and secondary base station with the target terminal. Connection does not need to rely on interaction between base stations, which is beneficial to improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
图9为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图。该方法可以应用于核心网侧。如图9所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the core network side. As shown in Figure 9, the method may include:
步骤S31、接收来自目标辅基站的第二需求消息,所述第二需求消息是所述目标辅基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下发送的,所述第二需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第二需求信息,所述第二需求信息包括针对辅连接的修改、删除或释放的需求信息。Step S31: Receive a second demand message from the target secondary base station, where the second demand message is sent by the target secondary base station when it detects that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, so The second demand message includes second demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the second demand information includes demand information for modification, deletion, or release of the secondary connection.
步骤S32、向主基站发送第三指示消息,所述第三指示消息中包括与所述第二需求信息对应的主连接命令信息。Step S32: Send a third instruction message to the primary base station, where the third instruction message includes primary connection command information corresponding to the second demand information.
步骤S33、接收来自所述主基站的第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息中包括与所述主连接命令信息对应的第二结果信息。Step S33: Receive a second response message from the primary base station, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the primary connection command information.
步骤S34、向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息。所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的修改、删除或释放。Step S34: Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. The specified operation includes modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S35、接收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。Step S35: Receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
在本实施例中,可以由辅基站发起对辅连接的指定操作。辅基站可以感知到目标终端与多个接入网网元(例如基站)的无线连接状态是否发生变化。目标终端与多个基站的无线连接发生变化的示例可以参见上述实施例的相关描述。如果目标辅基站感知到目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化,可以向核心网网元发送第二需求信息。核心网网元收到第二需求信息后,可以向主基站发送第三指示消息。主基站根据第三指示消息对自身的用户业务和主连接进行更新后,向核心网网元返回第二响应消息。核心网网元收到第二响应消息后,可以向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息。目标辅基站收到第一指示消息后,可以对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行修改、删除或释放等指定操作。 目标辅基站执行指定操作之后,可以向核心网网元返回第一响应消息,以通知核心网网元指定操作的执行是否成功。In this embodiment, the secondary base station can initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection. The secondary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment. If the target secondary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it may send the second demand information to the core network element. After receiving the second demand information, the core network element may send a third indication message to the main base station. After the main base station updates its own user service and main connection according to the third instruction message, it returns a second response message to the core network element. After receiving the second response message, the core network element may send the first indication message to the target secondary base station. After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station can perform designated operations such as modification, deletion, or release on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
以下分别介绍不同操作场景对应的第二需求消息的类型和内容。The type and content of the second demand message corresponding to different operation scenarios are respectively introduced below.
场景一:修改场景。Scene 1: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二需求消息可以为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second demand message may be a secondary base station modification demand message, and the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
所述第三指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。The third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
所述第一指示信息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第一指示消息中包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及已回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。The first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
在该场景中,如果目标辅基站向核心网网元发送辅基站修改需求消息。核心网网元收到辅基站修改需求消息后,可以向主基站发送辅基站修改请求消息。主基站根据辅基站修改请求消息对自身的用户业务和主连接进行更新后,向核心网网元返回第二响应消息。核心网网元收到第二响应消息后,可以向目标辅基站发送辅基站修改命令消息。目标辅基站收到辅基站修改命令消息,修改与目标终端之间的辅连接,并可以向核心网网元返回第一响应消息。In this scenario, if the target secondary base station sends a secondary base station modification requirement message to the core network element. After the core network element receives the secondary base station modification request message, it can send the secondary base station modification request message to the primary base station. After the primary base station updates its own user service and primary connection according to the secondary base station modification request message, it returns a second response message to the core network element. After receiving the second response message, the core network element may send a secondary base station modification command message to the target secondary base station. The target secondary base station receives the secondary base station modification command message, modifies the secondary connection with the target terminal, and may return a first response message to the core network element.
场景二:释放或删除场景。Scene 2: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。所述第三指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。所述第一指示信息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示消息中需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted. The third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and needs to be returned to the target secondary base station of the primary base station The remaining user service characteristic information. The first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
在该场景中,如果目标辅基站向核心网网元发送辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息。核心网网元收到辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消 息后,可以向主基站发送辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息。主基站根据辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息对自身的用户业务和主连接进行更新后,向核心网网元返回第二响应消息。核心网网元收到第二响应消息后,可以向目标辅基站发送辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息。目标辅基站收到辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息后,删除该目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接,向核心网网元返回第一响应消息,并可以释放或删除目标辅基站。In this scenario, if the target secondary base station sends a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message to the core network element. After the core network element receives the secondary base station release demand message or the secondary base station delete demand message, it can send the secondary base station release command message or the secondary base station delete command message to the primary base station. After the primary base station updates its user service and primary connection according to the secondary base station release command message or the secondary base station delete command message, it returns a second response message to the core network element. After receiving the second response message, the core network element may send a secondary base station release command message or secondary base station delete command message to the target secondary base station. After the target secondary base station receives the secondary base station release command message or secondary base station delete command message, it deletes the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, returns the first response message to the core network element, and can release or delete the target secondary base station. Base station.
本实施例在收到目标辅基站的需求信息后,能够通过核心网网元直接指示目标辅基站对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作,指示主辅基站更新与目标终端的主连接,无需依赖基站间交互,有利于提高多连接操作的灵活性。In this embodiment, after receiving the demand information of the target secondary base station, the core network element can directly instruct the target secondary base station to perform a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and instruct the primary and secondary base station to update the communication with the target terminal. The main connection does not need to rely on the interaction between base stations, which helps to improve the flexibility of multi-connection operations.
图10为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图。该方法可以应用于接入网侧。如图10所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the access network side. As shown in Figure 10, the method may include:
步骤S41、接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息。所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放。Step S41: Receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. The specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S42、对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作。Step S42: Perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
步骤S43、向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。Step S43: Send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
在一种实施方式中,可以由核心网网元发起对辅连接的指定操作。其中,核心网网元(例如5GC)可以感知到目标终端与多个接入网网元(例如基站)的无线连接状态是否发生变化。目标终端与多个基站的无线连接发生变化的示例可以参见上述实施例的相关描述。如果5GC感知到目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化,可以向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息。目标辅基站收到收到第一指示消息后,对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行建立、添加、修改、删除或释放等指定操作。目标辅基站执行指定操作之后,可以向核心网网元发送第一响应消息,以通知核心网网元指定操作的执行是否成功。In an embodiment, the network element of the core network may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection. Among them, the core network element (for example, 5GC) can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment. If the 5GC senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it may send a first indication message to the target secondary base station. After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs designated operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may send a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
以下分别介绍不同操作场景对应的第一指示消息和第一指示信息的类型和内容。The following respectively introduces the types and contents of the first indication message and the first indication information corresponding to different operation scenarios.
场景一:建立或添加场景。Scene 1: Create or add scenes.
在该场景中,所述第一指示消息可以为辅基站建立请求消息或辅基站添加请求消息,所述第一指示信息可以包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first indication message may be a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message, and the first indication information may include the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need for offloading User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
场景二:修改场景。Scene 2: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一指示消息可以为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第一指示信息可以包括需要从目标辅基站回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first indication message may be a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information may include user service characteristic information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re-distributed to the target secondary base station. User service characteristic information.
场景三:释放或删除场景。Scene 3: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一指示消息可以为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示信息可以包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first indication message may be a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the first indication information may include remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station to be deleted.
与上述场景对应,第二指示消息和第二指示消息的类型和内容分别示例如下:Corresponding to the above scenario, the types and contents of the second indication message and the second indication message are respectively as follows:
场景一:建立或添加场景。Scene 1: Create or add scenes.
在该场景中,所述第二指示消息可以为辅基站建立命令消息或辅基站添加命令消息,所述第二指示消息可以包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second indication message may be a secondary base station establishment command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
场景二:修改场景。Scene 2: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二指示消息可以为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第二指示消息可以包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second instruction message may be a secondary base station modification command message, and the second instruction message may include available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
场景三:释放或删除场景。Scene 3: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二指示消息可以为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第二指示消息可以包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second indication message may be a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message may include the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
在一种实施方式中,在步骤S43之后,该方法还可以包括:接收来自所述核心网网元的第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息是在所述核心网网元在所述第一结果信息表示指定操作成功的情况下发送的,所述第二指示消息中包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。In an implementation manner, after step S43, the method may further include: receiving a second indication message from the core network element, where the second indication message is when the core network element is in the first A result information indicates that it is sent when the specified operation is successful, and the second indication message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
具体来说,如果第一结果信息表示指定操作成功,则核心网网元可以向主基站发送第二指示消息。主基站收到第二指示消息后,可以更新主基站与目标终端之间的主连接。Specifically, if the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful, the core network element may send a second indication message to the primary base station. After receiving the second indication message, the primary base station can update the primary connection between the primary base station and the target terminal.
本实施例与图7的实施例的第一指示消息、第一指示信息、第一响应消息、第二指示消息等的类型和内容相同,可以参见该实施例的相关描述,在此不赘述。The type and content of the first indication message, the first indication information, the first response message, the second indication message, etc. in this embodiment are the same as those of the embodiment in FIG. 7, and reference may be made to the relevant description of this embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
图11为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图。该方法可以应用于接入网侧。如图11所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the access network side. As shown in Figure 11, the method may include:
步骤S51、在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下,向所述核心网网元发送第一需求消息,所述第一需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第一需求信息,所述第一需求消息包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放的需求。Step S51: In the case of detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and the multiple base stations has changed, send a first demand message to the core network element, where the first demand message includes information on the secondary connection First demand information for performing the specified operation, where the first demand message includes a demand for establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection.
步骤S52、接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放。Step S52: Receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the specified operation includes The establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S53、对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作。Step S53: Perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
步骤S54、向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。Step S54: Send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
在一种实施方式中,可以由主基站发起对辅连接的指定操作。主基站可以感知到目标终端与多个接入网网元(例如基站)的无线连接状态是否发生变化。目标终端与多个基站的无线连接发生变化的示例可以参见上述实施例的相关描述。如果主基站感知到目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化,可以向核心网网元发送第一需求消息。由核心网网元向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息。 目标辅基站收到第一指示消息后,对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行建立、添加、修改、删除或释放等指定操作。目标辅基站执行指定操作之后,可以向核心网网元返回第一响应消息,以通知核心网网元指定操作的执行是否成功。In an implementation manner, the primary base station may initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection. The primary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment. If the primary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it can send the first demand message to the core network element. The core network element sends the first indication message to the target secondary base station. After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station performs designated operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
以下分别介绍不同操作场景对应的第一需求消息的类型和内容。The following respectively introduces the type and content of the first demand message corresponding to different operation scenarios.
场景一:建立或添加场景。Scene 1: Create or add scenes.
在该场景中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站建立需求消息或辅基站添加需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
场景二:修改场景。Scene 2: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
场景三:释放或删除场景。Scene 3: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the first demand message includes the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
在一种实施方式中,在步骤S54之后,该方法还可以包括:接收来自所述核心网网元的第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息是在所述核心网网元在所述第一结果信息表示指定操作成功的情况下发送的,所述第二指示消息中包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。In an implementation manner, after step S54, the method may further include: receiving a second indication message from the core network element, where the second indication message is when the core network element is in the first A result information indicates that it is sent when the specified operation is successful, and the second indication message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
本实施例与图8的实施例的第一需求消息、第一需求信息、第一指示消息、第一指示信息、第一响应消息、第二指示消息等的类型和内容相同,可以参见该实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。The type and content of the first demand message, the first demand information, the first instruction message, the first instruction information, the first response message, the second instruction message, etc. in this embodiment are the same as those of the embodiment of FIG. 8. The relevant description of the example will not be repeated here.
图12为本申请另一实施例提供的连接方法的流程示意图。该方法可以应用于接入网侧。如图12所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a connection method provided by another embodiment of this application. This method can be applied to the access network side. As shown in Figure 12, the method may include:
步骤S61、在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下,向所述核心网网元发送第二需求消息,所述第二需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第二需求信息。所述第二需求信息包括针对所述辅 连接的修改、删除或释放的需求。Step S61: In the case of detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, send a second demand message to the core network element, where the second demand message includes information on the secondary connection Second demand information for performing the specified operation. The second demand information includes a demand for modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S62、接收来自所述核心网网元的第三指示消息,所述第三指示消息中包括与所述第二需求信息对应的主连接命令信息。Step S62: Receive a third instruction message from the core network element, where the third instruction message includes main connection command information corresponding to the second demand information.
步骤S63、向所述核心网网元发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息中包括与所述主连接命令信息对应的第二结果信息。Step S63: Send a second response message to the core network element, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the main connection command information.
步骤S64、接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息。所述指定操作包括针对所述辅连接的修改、删除或释放。Step S64: Receive a first instruction message from the core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. The specified operation includes modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
步骤S65、对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作。Step S65: Perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal.
步骤S66、向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。Step S66: Send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
在本实施例中,可以由辅基站发起对辅连接的指定操作。辅基站可以感知到目标终端与多个接入网网元(例如基站)的无线连接状态是否发生变化。目标终端与多个基站的无线连接发生变化的示例可以参见上述实施例的相关描述。如果目标辅基站感知到目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化,可以向核心网网元发送第二需求信息。核心网网元收到第二需求信息后,可以向主基站发送第三指示消息。主基站收到第三指示消息后,可以根据第三指示消息对自身的用户业务和主连接进行更新后,向核心网网元返回第二响应消息。核心网网元收到第二响应消息后,可以向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息。目标辅基站收到第一指示消息后,可以对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行修改、删除或释放等指定操作。目标辅基站执行指定操作之后,可以向核心网网元返回第一响应消息,以通知核心网网元指定操作的执行是否成功。In this embodiment, the secondary base station can initiate the designated operation of the secondary connection. The secondary base station can perceive whether the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple access network elements (for example, base stations) has changed. For examples of changes in the wireless connection between the target terminal and multiple base stations, reference may be made to the relevant description of the foregoing embodiment. If the target secondary base station senses that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, it may send the second demand information to the core network element. After receiving the second demand information, the core network element may send a third indication message to the main base station. After receiving the third indication message, the main base station may update its user service and main connection according to the third indication message, and then return a second response message to the core network element. After receiving the second response message, the core network element may send the first indication message to the target secondary base station. After receiving the first indication message, the target secondary base station can perform designated operations such as modification, deletion, or release on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. After the target secondary base station performs the specified operation, it may return a first response message to the core network element to notify the core network element whether the execution of the specified operation is successful.
以下分别介绍不同操作场景对应的第二需求消息的类型和内容。The type and content of the second demand message corresponding to different operation scenarios are respectively introduced below.
场景一:修改场景。Scene 1: Modify the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。所述第三指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源 信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。所述第一指示信息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第一指示消息中包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及已回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station. The third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station. The first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
场景二:释放或删除场景。Scene 2: Release or delete the scene.
在该场景中,所述第二需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。所述第三指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。所述第一指示信息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示消息中需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In this scenario, the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted. The third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and needs to be returned to the target secondary base station of the primary base station The remaining user service characteristic information. The first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
本实施例与图9的实施例的第二需求消息、第二需求信息、第三指示消息、第二响应信息、第一指示消息、第一指示信息、第一响应消息、第二指示消息等的类型和内容相同,可以参见该实施例的相关描述,在此不赘述。The second demand message, the second demand information, the third instruction message, the second response information, the first instruction message, the first instruction information, the first response message, the second instruction message, etc. in this embodiment and the embodiment of FIG. 9 The type and content of the are the same, please refer to the related description of this embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在图10、图11和图12对应的实施例中,在新建或添加场景中,对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作,包括:根据所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息,建立与所述目标终端的辅连接,以将所述用户业务分流到目标辅基站,以使目标辅基站继续承载传输。In the embodiments corresponding to FIG. 10, FIG. 11, and FIG. 12, in a new or adding scenario, performing the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal includes: according to the target The available auxiliary connection capability and resource information in the terminal, as well as the user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target auxiliary base station, establish an auxiliary connection with the target terminal to offload the user service to the target auxiliary base station, so that the target auxiliary base station The base station continues to carry the transmission.
在修改场景中,对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作,包括:将需要回流的用户业务承载传输资源从目标辅基站删除,或为重新分流的用户业务分配新承载传输资源。In the modified scenario, performing the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal includes: deleting user service bearer transmission resources that need to be returned from the target secondary base station, or re-offloading users The service allocates new bearer transmission resources.
在删除场景中,对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作,包括:将剩余的用户业务承载传输资源从目标辅基站删除,并释放或删除所述目标辅基站。In the deletion scenario, performing the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal includes: deleting the remaining user service bearer transmission resources from the target secondary base station, and releasing or deleting the target Secondary base station.
以下是本申请在双连接模式的应用示例,多连接模式的原理与双连接模式类似,可以参考双连接模式的相关描述。The following is an application example of the present application in the dual connection mode. The principle of the multi-connection mode is similar to the dual connection mode. You can refer to the related description of the dual connection mode.
如图13所示,目标SN的移动有着可预知的规律性。目标SN和MN之间无需建立Xn接口连接,但目标SN和5GC可建立S-NG接口连接。5GC和MN通过定位和时间信息,可以推测预知:何时可以添加哪个目标SN作为分流辅基站。将某被5GS网络服务的终端UE的整体无线链路能力(或称无线接入能力UE Radio Access Capability)分割成相对独立的两部分。例如,分别用P-UE和S-UE来表示或标识。其中,P-UE和S-UE两边的各个能力和资源属性之和等于该UE总能力和资源。如果UE能够同时连接主基站和多个辅基站,则无线链路能力可以分为P-UE和多个S-UE。As shown in Figure 13, the movement of the target SN has a predictable regularity. There is no need to establish an Xn interface connection between the target SN and MN, but the target SN and 5GC can establish an S-NG interface connection. 5GC and MN can infer and predict when and which target SN can be added as offload secondary base station through positioning and time information. Divide the overall radio link capability (or UE Radio Access Capability) of a terminal UE served by the 5GS network into two relatively independent parts. For example, they are represented or identified by P-UE and S-UE respectively. Among them, the sum of the respective capabilities and resource attributes of the P-UE and S-UE is equal to the total capabilities and resources of the UE. If the UE can connect to the primary base station and multiple secondary base stations at the same time, the radio link capability can be divided into P-UE and multiple S-UEs.
进一步地,可按照预定义的静态方式(相对固定的分割)进行UE能力分割;也可按照网络侧的命令方式来进行半静态地分割,即可按需改变具体的分割的能力内容和主辅侧比例。P-UE和S-UE能力可以包括针对可共享属性能力对象按特定的比例分割。如:UE内部可共享的RF(Radio Frequency,射频)、天线模块群、Buffer(缓存)资源和基带处理器等硬件类资源,或支持的频段组合(Band Combination)信息,承载标识(RB id)等软件类资源。P-UE和S-UE分割的能力也可以包括针对非共享属性能力的分割。如:对于支持多模能力的UE,某种RAT制式对应的资源全部分给P-UE,其它RAT制式对应的资源全部分给S-UE,它们之间不是上述按比例分割的关系。Furthermore, UE capability segmentation can be performed according to a predefined static method (relatively fixed segmentation); it can also be segmented semi-statically according to the command method of the network side, which can change the specific segmented capability content and main and auxiliary as needed. Side ratio. The capabilities of P-UE and S-UE may include partitioning objects with sharable attribute capabilities at a specific ratio. For example: hardware resources such as RF (Radio Frequency), antenna module group, Buffer (buffer) resources and baseband processor that can be shared within the UE, or supported band combination (Band Combination) information, bearer identification (RB id) And other software resources. The capability of P-UE and S-UE segmentation may also include segmentation for non-shared attribute capabilities. For example, for a UE that supports multi-mode capabilities, the resources corresponding to a certain RAT standard are all given to the P-UE, and the resources corresponding to other RATs are all given to the S-UE. The relationship between them is not the aforementioned proportional division.
进一步地,“被能力分割的”UE在一定的观察或操作时间窗内,对外能呈现出两个相对独立的“虚拟子UE”。它们各自的无线能力集合,能被主辅基站MN/SN和核心网5GC所感知和利用。其中,P-UE的状态和移动性表示该UE整体的RRC状态和移动性;S-UE主要提供用户面数据传输的辅助分流功能,不影响该UE的整体控制面属性和RRC状态。Furthermore, a UE that is "capacity-divided" can present two relatively independent "virtual sub UEs" to the outside within a certain observation or operation time window. Their respective wireless capabilities set can be perceived and utilized by the primary and secondary base stations MN/SN and the core network 5GC. Among them, the status and mobility of the P-UE represent the overall RRC status and mobility of the UE; the S-UE mainly provides an auxiliary offloading function for user plane data transmission, and does not affect the overall control plane attributes and RRC status of the UE.
在UE进入双连接工作模式之前,主基站(MN)可利用UE的全部无线链路能力,并可通过NGAP流程消息提前上报给5GC。后续可行的P-UE和S-UE能力分割方式的信息,示例如下:Before the UE enters the dual connectivity working mode, the primary base station (MN) can utilize all the radio link capabilities of the UE, and can report to the 5GC in advance through the NGAP process message. The following examples of feasible P-UE and S-UE capability division methods are as follows:
选项1:P-UE x+S-UE y;Option 1: P-UE x + S-UE y;
选项2:P-UE m+S-UE nOption 2: P-UE m+S-UE n
……;...
选项x:P-UE k+S-UE hOption x: P-UE k+S-UE h
5GC接收并保存上述P-UE和S-UE能力分割方式的信息,后续进行双连接操作备用。The 5GC receives and saves the information of the above-mentioned P-UE and S-UE capability division method, and then performs the dual connection operation for backup.
以下分别介绍几种辅连接相关操作的发起方式。The following describes the initiation methods of several auxiliary connection related operations.
第一种方式:MN发起。The first way: MN initiates.
主基站MN通过定位和时间信息,可推测预知:何时可添加哪个目标SN作为分流辅基站SN,即该目标SN具备和MN做双连接操作的条件。因此,网络侧可以对SN进行建立、添加、修改、删除或释放等操作,无需依赖UE的RRM测量上报,MN可实时地按需向5GC触发。The primary base station MN can infer and predict when and which target SN can be added as the offloaded secondary base station SN through the positioning and time information, that is, the target SN has the conditions for dual connection operation with the MN. Therefore, the network side can perform operations such as establishing, adding, modifying, deleting, or releasing the SN, without relying on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and the MN can trigger the 5GC in real time as needed.
进一步地,主基站MN可通过NGAP流程消息,请求5GC进行特定目标SN的建立或添加操作。如:MN向5GC发送NGAP:SN Addition Required消息,其中包括:目标SN信息和待SN承载分流掉的当前MN侧用户业务数据信息,如PDU Session/QoS Flows id(标识)等。Further, the main base station MN can request the 5GC to establish or add a specific target SN through the NGAP process message. For example, the MN sends a NGAP: SN Addition Required message to the 5GC, which includes the target SN information and the current MN side user service data information to be offloaded by the SN bearer, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id (identification), etc.
如果5GC同意进入双连接工作模式,5GC可基于NGAP流程消息指示MN进入双连接工作模式。之后MN只利用5GC指示的P-UE侧的无线链路能力,不再利用S-UE侧的无线链路能力。如:MN接收来自5GC的NGAP流程消息:SN Addition Command消息,其中指示某种5GC选定的P-UE x+S-UE y能力分割组合或相关索引标识和被目标SN接纳成功分流掉的用户业务数据信息,如PDU Session/QoS Flows id标识等。If the 5GC agrees to enter the dual-connection working mode, the 5GC can instruct the MN to enter the dual-connection working mode based on the NGAP process message. After that, the MN only uses the radio link capability of the P-UE side indicated by the 5GC, and no longer uses the radio link capability of the S-UE side. For example, the MN receives the NGAP process message from 5GC: SN Addition Command message, which indicates a certain 5GC selected P-UE x+S-UE y capability division combination or related index identification and the user who was successfully offloaded by the target SN Service data information, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identification, etc.
在进入双连接工作模式之后,主基站MN和UE建立并维护P-RL(主无线链路),同时和5GC具有P-NG-C主控制面连接和P-NG-U主用户面连接实例,它们用来传输MN侧的控制信令和用户业务数据,具体各种操作和UE单连接操作类似。After entering the dual-connection working mode, the main base station MN and UE establish and maintain P-RL (Primary Radio Link), and have P-NG-C main control plane connection and P-NG-U main user plane connection instances with 5GC They are used to transmit control signaling and user service data on the MN side. The specific operations are similar to those of the UE single connection.
进一步地,主基站MN还可通过NGAP流程消息,请求5GC进行针对当前目标SN修改、删除或释放等操作。如:MN向5GC发送NGAP:SN Modification Required消息或SN Release Required消息,其中包括待修改或删除的目标SN和相关用户业务数据信息。类似地,如果5GC同意修改或退出双连接工作模式,MN接收来自5GC的NGAP流程消息:SN Modification Command或SN Release  Command消息,其中包括5GC确认的已修改或删除的目标SN和相关用户业务数据信息。Further, the main base station MN can also request the 5GC to modify, delete or release the current target SN through the NGAP process message. For example, MN sends NGAP: SN Modification Required message or SN Release Required message to 5GC, which includes the target SN to be modified or deleted and related user service data information. Similarly, if 5GC agrees to modify or exit the dual-connection working mode, MN receives the NGAP process message from 5GC: SN Modification Command or SN Release Command message, which includes the modified or deleted target SN and related user service data information confirmed by 5GC .
第二种方式:5GC发起。The second way: 5GC initiated.
5GC通过定位和时间信息,也可推测预知:所辖的目标MN何时可以添加哪个目标SN作为分流辅基站SN,即目标MN和SN在哪段时间窗内具备做双连接操作的条件。因此,5GC可主动触发并决定网络侧SN建立、添加、修改、删除或释放操作,此时可以无需依赖主基站MN的NGAP上行消息请求。Based on the positioning and time information, the 5GC can also predict and predict: when the target MN under its jurisdiction can add which target SN as the offload secondary base station SN, that is, in which time window the target MN and SN have the conditions for dual connection operation. Therefore, the 5GC can actively trigger and determine the network-side SN establishment, addition, modification, deletion, or release operations, and there is no need to rely on the NGAP uplink message request of the primary base station MN at this time.
进一步地,如果5GC接收到来自主基站MN关于目标SN建立、添加、修改、删除或释放操作请求之后,可决定是否进入、修改或退出双连接工作模式。Further, if the 5GC receives a request from the autonomous base station MN to establish, add, modify, delete, or release the target SN, it can decide whether to enter, modify or exit the dual connection working mode.
如果5GC决定进入双连接工作模式,则通过NGAP流程消息向目标SN发送SN添加请求操作,并尝试建立S-NG-C辅控制面连接、S-NG-U辅用户面连接实例,和SN辅基站侧相关的无线链路资源。这取决于MN或5GC需分流多少的UE用户业务数据到SN侧。如:5GC向目标SN发送NGAP流程消息:SN Addition Request消息,其中包括待SN分流承载建立的原本属于MN侧的用户业务数据信息,如PDU Session/QoS Flows id标识。类似地,5GC还可向目标SN发送NGAP流程消息:SN Modification Request或SN Release Command消息,其中包括待SN修改或删除的当前SN侧的用户业务数据信息,如PDU Session/QoS Flows id标识。If the 5GC decides to enter the dual-connection working mode, it will send the SN add request operation to the target SN through the NGAP process message, and try to establish the S-NG-C auxiliary control plane connection, the S-NG-U auxiliary user plane connection instance, and the SN auxiliary Wireless link resources related to the base station side. This depends on how much UE user service data the MN or 5GC needs to offload to the SN side. For example, the 5GC sends the NGAP process message to the target SN: SN Addition Request message, which includes the user service data information originally belonging to the MN side to be established by the SN offload bearer, such as the PDU Session/QoS Flows id identifier. Similarly, the 5GC can also send NGAP process messages to the target SN: SN Modification Request or SN Release Command messages, which include user service data information on the current SN to be modified or deleted by the SN, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identification.
第三种方式:SN发起。The third way: SN initiated.
目标辅基站SN基于来自5GC的NGAP流程消息,尝试建立S-NG-C辅控制面连接、S-NG-U辅用户面连接实例和SN辅基站侧相关的无线链路资源,并通过NGAP流程消息回复给5GC上述SN建立的结果。如:SN向5GC发送NGAP流程消息:SN Addition Request Acknowledge消息,其中包括成功和失败建立的用户业务数据信息,如PDU Session/QoS Flows id标识和数据前传Data Forwarding传输通道地址等。类似地,目标辅基站SN基于来自5GC的NGAP流程消息,尝试执行SN修改或删除相关操作,并回复给5GC上述修改或删除的结果。如:SN向5GC发送NGAP流程消息:SN Modification Request Acknowledge或SN Release Complete消息。Based on the NGAP process message from 5GC, the target secondary base station SN tries to establish S-NG-C secondary control plane connection, S-NG-U secondary user plane connection instance and SN secondary base station side related wireless link resources, and passes the NGAP process The message replies to the result of the above SN establishment by 5GC. For example, SN sends NGAP process message to 5GC: SN Addition Request Acknowledge message, which includes user service data information established successfully and failed, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identification and Data Forwarding transmission channel address. Similarly, the target secondary base station SN attempts to perform SN modification or deletion related operations based on the NGAP process message from 5GC, and replies to the 5GC with the result of the above modification or deletion. For example: SN sends NGAP process message to 5GC: SN Modification Request Acknowledge or SN Release Complete message.
在UE进入双连接工作模式之后,辅基站SN和UE建立并维护S-RL辅无线链路,同时和5GC有着S-NG-C辅控制面连接和S-NG-U辅用户面连接实例,它们用来传输SN侧的控制信令和用户业务数据,具体各种操作和当前UE单连接操作类似。After the UE enters the dual-connection working mode, the secondary base station SN establishes and maintains the S-RL secondary radio link with the UE, and at the same time has an S-NG-C secondary control plane connection and S-NG-U secondary user plane connection instance with the 5GC. They are used to transmit control signaling and user service data on the SN side. The specific operations are similar to the current UE single-connection operations.
进一步地,辅基站SN可通过NGAP流程消息,主动请求5GC进行当前SN的修改和删除操作,比如:SN向5GC主动触发发送NGAP流程消息:SN Modification Required消息或SN Release Required消息,其中包括待SN修改或删除的当前SN侧的用户业务数据信息,如PDU Session/QoS Flows id标识。Further, the secondary base station SN can actively request the 5GC to modify and delete the current SN through the NGAP process message. For example, the SN actively triggers the sending of the NGAP process message to the 5GC: SN Modification Required message or SN Release Required message, which includes the pending SN Modified or deleted user service data information on the current SN side, such as PDU Session/QoS Flows id identifier.
5GC可根据内部实现,无需MN或SN的SN Release Required消息请求,而自己主动触发决定是否退出当前的双连接工作模式。如果5GC决定退出双连接工作模式,则通过NGAP流程消息向目标MN和SN命令恢复到单连接工作模式。之后MN可恢复利用整个UE的全部无线链路能力,如:5GC向目标MN和SN分别发送NGAP流程消息:SN Release Command消息。The 5GC can be implemented internally, without the SN Release Required message request of the MN or SN, and it actively triggers the decision whether to exit the current dual-connection working mode. If the 5GC decides to exit the dual-connection working mode, it will instruct the target MN and SN to return to the single-connection working mode through the NGAP process message. After that, the MN can resume using all the radio link capabilities of the entire UE. For example, 5GC sends NGAP process messages: SN Release Command messages to the target MN and SN respectively.
在UE退出双连接工作模式之后,S-NG-C辅控制面连接、S-NG-U辅用户面连接实例,和SN辅基站侧相关的无线链路资源都可被释放,或暂被SN辅基站保留但去激活不工作。P-NG-C主控制面连接、P-NG-U主用户面连接实例和MN主基站侧相关的无线链路资源都可被重新配置更新。After the UE exits the dual-connection working mode, the S-NG-C secondary control plane connection, the S-NG-U secondary user plane connection instance, and the radio link resources related to the SN secondary base station side can all be released, or temporarily SN The secondary base station remains but deactivation does not work. The P-NG-C main control plane connection, the P-NG-U main user plane connection instance, and the radio link resources related to the MN main base station side can all be reconfigured and updated.
本申请提供一种通过核心网(5GC)主控UE进行双/多连接数据传输操作的方法。该方法不需建立或维护主辅基站之间的Xn接口连接(例如可以无任何Xn-C或Xn-U接口连接),5GC和主辅基站需要建立和维护各自独立的NG接口连接(同时建立NG-C和NG-U接口连接)。网络侧管理UE双/多连接工作模式,无需依赖UE针对目标SN的RRM测量上报,利用自身的基站定位和时间等先验信息(如卫星基站的星历信息),可预知推测目标MN和SN之间做双/多连接操作的条件关系,从而更灵活地去管理UE双/多连接工作模式。本申请可以支持MN和SN各自触发某些双/多连接的基本操作,由5GC做最终的判定决策和用户业务数据分流回流的管理。This application provides a method for controlling a UE to perform dual/multiple connection data transmission operations through a core network (5GC). This method does not need to establish or maintain the Xn interface connection between the primary and secondary base stations (for example, there may be no Xn-C or Xn-U interface connection), and the 5GC and the primary and secondary base stations need to establish and maintain their own independent NG interface connections (set up at the same time) NG-C and NG-U interface connection). The network side manages the UE dual/multiple connection working mode, without relying on the UE's RRM measurement and reporting for the target SN, and uses its own base station location and time and other prior information (such as the ephemeris information of the satellite base station) to predict the target MN and SN The conditional relationship between the dual/multiple connection operation, so as to manage the UE dual/multiple connection working mode more flexibly. This application can support the MN and SN to trigger certain basic operations of dual/multiple connections, and the 5GC will make the final decision and management of user service data shunting and returning.
应用示例1:MN发起建立或添加SN的流程。Application example 1: MN initiates the process of establishing or adding SN.
如图14a所示:某LEO低轨卫星通讯系统中,若干颗LEO低轨卫星在特定的近地球轨道上。这些卫星可以按预定的星历信息,周期地绕着地球大圈运行。它们承载着完整的gNB基站功能(称为gNB型卫星),为地面用户UEs提供着卫星无线接入服务。地面上部署有若干个卫星地面站网关(NTN-GW)实体,它们集成在5GC核心网实体内。每颗LEO卫星依赖自身的定位能力,根据当前运行的物理经纬度位置,能够适时地和地面一个或多个NTN-GW/5GC分别建立和维持一条或多条Feeder link承载传输链接,用来承载传输NG接口连接实例。每颗LEO卫星可以对地面预定区域投射波束覆盖(图14a中大椭圆,通常覆盖半径远远大于地面基站的服务小区的覆盖)。随着LEO卫星的移动,这些卫星波束覆盖也在地面滑动,和陆基的地面蜂窝覆盖(图14a中小椭圆)形成异频重叠覆盖。As shown in Figure 14a: In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example. Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 14a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (the small ellipse in Figure 14a).
如图14b所示,MN发起添加SN的流程可以包括以下步骤:As shown in Figure 14b, the process of MN initiating adding SN may include the following steps:
S100:T1时刻,卫星基站A-gNB1锚点连接在NTN-GW/5GC1上,同时地面基站MN也锚点连接在相同的NTN-GW/5GC1上。MN和5GC1根据网管配置信息,拥有该LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息。例如,哪颗LEO卫星什么时间将运行到哪个轨道位置,该卫星对应的波束地面覆盖大概在哪个区域等。因此,MN和5GC1能够推测得知:在T1前后的一段观察时间内,卫星基站A-gNB1波束的地面覆盖和主基站MN的无线覆盖有一定的重叠,从而可能进行地空双连接操作。某处于连接态的UE正在被主基站MN小区(图14a中小椭圆)服务,已建立了PDU会话1(PDU Session1)和PDU会话2(PDU Session2)用户业务数据相关的无线资源和NG接口连接传输通道等。该UE支持本申请的P-UE和S-UE能力分割,并且将可支持的能力分割信息上报给MN和5GC1。根据天地融合一体化蜂窝系统的本地策略(比如:漫游安全或计费因素),PDU Session1用户业务数据可被LEO卫星无线链路承载传输。在步骤S100中,MN可以通过终端无线能力报告(UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT)消息或终端能力信息指示(UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION)消息,上报和协同UE支持的P-UE和S-UE能力和资源分割的信息。S100: At T1, the anchor point of the satellite base station A-gNB1 is connected to the NTN-GW/5GC1, and the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1. MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover. Therefore, MN and 5GC1 can infer that during the observation period before and after T1, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN have a certain overlap, so that the ground-air dual connection operation may be performed. A connected UE is being served by the main base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 14a), and PDU Session 1 (PDU Session 1) and PDU Session 2 (PDU Session 2) have been established for user service data related radio resources and NG interface connection transmission Channel etc. The UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the supportable capability division information to the MN and 5GC1. According to the local strategy (such as roaming security or billing factors) of the integrated cellular system with space and ground, PDU Session1 user service data can be carried and transmitted by the LEO satellite radio link. In step S100, the MN can report and coordinate the P-UE and S-UE capabilities and resource partitioning supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message. information.
S101:MN根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息,不依赖于UE的RRM测 量上报,在合适的时刻向5GC1发送辅基站添加需求(SN ADDITION REQUIRED)消息。该消息中包括请求把当前MN侧正在承载服务的PDU Session1中所有的QoS Flows分流到目标辅基站SN-gNB1。MN同时还可以建议做数据前传(Data Forwarding)操作,以减少分流操作中的数据丢包。其中,数据前传可以包括将需要分流的用户业务在源节点侧剩余未成功发送的数据包继续发送给5GC1。S101: According to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system, the MN does not rely on the UE's RRM measurement report, and sends a secondary base station add request (SN ADDITION REQUIRED) message to the 5GC1 at an appropriate time. The message includes a request to offload all the QoS Flows in the PDU Session1 currently carrying the service on the MN side to the target secondary base station SN-gNB1. At the same time, the MN can also suggest a data forwarding operation to reduce data packet loss in the offloading operation. Wherein, the data forwarding may include continuing to send to 5GC1 the remaining unsuccessful data packets of user services that need to be offloaded on the source node side.
S102:5GC1接收到MN的需求消息,根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息和系统本地策略,判定可以将PDU Session1中所有的QoS Flows分流到目标SN-gNB1。5GC1向SN-gNB1发送辅基站添加请求(SN ADDITION REQUEST)消息。该消息中包括通知目标SN-gNB1可利用的S-UE能力,请求在SN-gNB1侧建立PDU Session1相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S102: 5GC1 receives the demand message of the MN, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that all QoS Flows in PDU Session1 can be diverted to the target SN-gNB1. 5GC1 sends the secondary base station to SN-gNB1 Add request (SN ADDITION REQUEST) message. This message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 of the available S-UE capabilities, requesting the establishment of PDU and Session1 related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
S103:SN-gNB1接收到5GC1的请求消息,进行本地资源接纳控制。如果SN-gNB1判定可为PDU Session1成功建立所有相关资源,可以向5GC1发送辅基站添加响应消息,例如辅基站添加确认(SN ADDITION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE)消息。该消息中包括通知5GC1已成功建立PDU Session1,以及SN-gNB1侧的相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。SN-gNB1还可以同时提供做数据前传(Data Forwarding)的传输地址信息,以实现从MN侧来的数据前传操作。S103: SN-gNB1 receives the 5GC1 request message, and performs local resource admission control. If SN-gNB1 determines that all relevant resources can be successfully established for PDU Session1, it can send a secondary base station addition response message to 5GC1, such as a secondary base station addition confirmation (SN ADDITION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message. The message includes notifying 5GC1 that PDU Session1 has been successfully established, as well as related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface. SN-gNB1 can also provide transmission address information for data forwarding at the same time, so as to realize the data forwarding operation from the MN side.
S104:5GC1接收到SN-gNB1的确认消息,得知SN-gNB1侧已成功分流建立PDU Session1,可以向MN发送辅基站添加命令(SN ADDITION COMMAND)消息。该消息中包括通知MN进入双连接操作后可利用的P-UE能力和资源,和已成功分流PDU Session1到SN-gNB1侧的结果。然后MN可删除掉原来服务PDU Session1的相关无线资源,和P-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S104: 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from SN-gNB1, knows that the SN-gNB1 side has successfully offloaded to establish PDU Session1, and can send a secondary base station add command (SN ADDITION COMMAND) message to the MN. The message includes the P-UE capabilities and resources available to the MN to notify the MN to enter the dual connectivity operation, and the result of successfully offloading PDU Session1 to the SN-gNB1 side. Then the MN can delete the related radio resources of the original service PDU Session1, the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
在S104之后:MN和P-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,建立且维护P-RL无线链路,此后仅传输PDU Session2用户业务数据。SN-gNB1和S-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,建立且维护S-RL无线链路,此后仅传输PDU Session1用 户业务数据。After S104: MN and P-UE use RRC reconfiguration messages to establish and maintain the P-RL radio link, and then only transmit PDU Session2 user service data. SN-gNB1 and S-UE use RRC reconfiguration messages to establish and maintain S-RL radio links, and then only transmit PDU and Session1 user service data.
本应用示例中的添加(ADDITION)有时也称为建立(CREATE)。相应的,与添加相关的消息,也可以修改为与建立相关的消息。例如,辅基站建立需求(SN CREATE REQUIRED)消息、辅基站建立请求(SN CREATE REQUEST)消息、辅基站建立确认(SN CREATE REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE)消息、辅基站建立命令(SN CREATE COMMAND)消息等。以下其他应用示例中也是类似的情况,不再赘述。Addition in this application example is sometimes called CREATE. Correspondingly, the message related to the addition can also be modified to the message related to the establishment. For example, a secondary base station establishment request (SN CREATE REQUIRED) message, a secondary base station establishment request (SN CREATE REQUEST) message, a secondary base station establishment confirmation (SN CREATE REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message, a secondary base station establishment command (SN CREATE COMMAND) message, etc. The following other application examples are similar situations, so I won't repeat them.
应用示例2:MN发起修改SN的流程。Application example 2: MN initiates the process of modifying SN.
如图15a所示:某LEO低轨卫星通讯系统中,若干颗LEO低轨卫星在特定的近地球轨道上。这些卫星可以按预定的星历信息,周期地绕着地球大圈运行。它们承载着完整的gNB基站功能(称为gNB型卫星),为地面用户UEs提供着卫星无线接入服务。地面上部署有若干个卫星地面站网关NTN-GW实体,它们集成在5GC核心网实体内。每颗LEO卫星依赖自身的定位能力,根据当前运行的物理经纬度位置,能够适时地和地面一个或多个NTN-GW/5GC分别建立和维持一条或多条Feeder link承载传输链接,用来承载传输NG接口连接实例。每颗LEO卫星可以对地面预定区域投射波束覆盖(图15a中大椭圆,通常覆盖半径远远大于地面基站的服务小区的覆盖)。随着LEO卫星的移动,这些卫星波束覆盖也在地面滑动,和陆基的地面蜂窝覆盖(图15a中小椭圆)形成异频重叠覆盖。As shown in Figure 15a: In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. Several satellite ground station gateway NTN-GW entities are deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example. Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 15a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (small ellipse in Figure 15a).
如图15b所示,MN发起修改SN的流程可以包括以下步骤:As shown in Figure 15b, the process of MN initiating to modify SN may include the following steps:
S200:T1之后的T2时刻,不断移动的卫星基站A-gNB1仍然锚点连接在NTN-GW/5GC1上,同时地面基站MN也锚点连接在相同的NTN-GW/5GC1上。MN和5GC1根据网管配置信息,拥有该LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息。例如,哪颗LEO卫星什么时间将运行到哪个轨道位置,该卫星对应的波束地面覆盖大概在哪个区域。因此,MN和5GC1都能推测得知:在T2前后的一段观察时间内,卫星基站A-gNB1波束的地面覆盖和主基站MN的无线覆盖有一定的重叠,从而可以继续维持地空双连接操作。某已经处于地空双连接操作的UE正在同时被主基站MN小区(图15a中小椭圆)和辅基站SN-gNB1(图15a中大椭圆) 所服务,已各自建立了PDU Session2和PDU Session1用户业务数据相关的无线资源和NG接口连接传输通道等。该UE支持本申请的P-UE和S-UE能力分割,并且将更新后的能力分割信息上报给MN和5GC1。根据系统本地策略(比如:漫游安全或计费因素),PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows用户业务数据需回流到MN承载传输。在步骤S200中,MN可以通过终端无线能力报告(UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT)消息或终端能力信息指示(UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION)消息,上报更新后的UE支持的P-UE和S-UE能力分割的信息。S200: At time T2 after T1, the constantly moving satellite base station A-gNB1 is still anchored to the NTN-GW/5GC1, while the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1. MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover. Therefore, both MN and 5GC1 can infer that during the observation period before and after T2, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN have a certain overlap, so that the ground-air dual connection operation can be maintained . A UE that is already in ground-air dual connection operation is being served by the primary base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 15a) and secondary base station SN-gNB1 (large ellipse in Figure 15a) at the same time, and PDU Session 2 and PDU Session 1 user services have been established respectively Data-related wireless resources and NG interfaces are connected to transmission channels, etc. The UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the updated capability division information to the MN and 5GC1. According to the system's local policy (such as roaming security or billing factors), part of the QoS Flows user service data in PDU Session 1 needs to be returned to the MN for transmission. In step S200, the MN can report the updated P-UE and S-UE capability split information supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message .
S201:MN根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息,不依赖于UE的RRM测量上报,在合适的时刻向5GC1发送辅基站修改需求(SN MODIFICATION REQUIRED)消息。该消息中包括:请求把当前SN-gNB1侧正在承载服务的PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows回流到MN去承载传输。MN同时还可以建议做数据前传(Data Forwarding)操作,在上述消息中可以提供相应的数据前传传输地址信息,以减少回流操作中的数据丢包。S201: According to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system, the MN does not rely on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUIRED) message to the 5GC1 at an appropriate time. This message includes a request to return part of the QoS Flows in the PDU Session1 currently carrying the service on the SN-gNB1 side to the MN for bearer transmission. At the same time, the MN can also suggest a data forwarding (Data Forwarding) operation. The corresponding data forwarding transmission address information can be provided in the above message to reduce data packet loss in the return operation.
S202:5GC1接收到MN的需求消息,根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息和系统本地策略,判定可以将PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows回流到MN。5GC1向目标SN-gNB1发送辅基站修改请求(SN MODIFICATION REQUEST)消息。该消息中包括通知目标SN-gNB1更新后可利用的S-UE能力,请求在SN-gNB1侧重配置剩下的部分PDU Session1相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S202: 5GC1 receives the demand message of the MN, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session1 can be returned to the MN. 5GC1 sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST) message to the target SN-gNB1. The message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 of the available S-UE capabilities after the update, and requesting that SN-gNB1 focus on configuring the remaining part of the PDU and Session1 related radio resources, and the control plane, user plane and transmission connected to the S-NG interface Resources etc.
S203:SN-gNB1接收到5GC1的请求消息,删除掉待回流的PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows和相关资源,重配置剩下的部分PDU Session1。然后,SN-gNB1向5GC1发送辅基站修改响应消息,例如辅基站修改确认(SN MODIFICATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE)消息。该消息中包括通知5GC1已成功删除PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows和相关资源,以及成功重配置SN-gNB1侧的相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。SN-gNB1还可以针对回流的部分QoS Flows进行数据前传(Data Forwarding)操作。S203: SN-gNB1 receives the request message of 5GC1, deletes part of QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session1 to be returned, and reconfigures the remaining part of PDU Session1. Then, SN-gNB1 sends a secondary base station modification response message to 5GC1, for example, a secondary base station modification confirmation (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message. This message includes notifying 5GC1 that it has successfully deleted some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session1, as well as successfully reconfiguring related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface. SN-gNB1 can also perform data forwarding (Data Forwarding) for some of the returned QoS Flows.
S204:5GC1接收到SN-gNB1的确认消息,得知SN-gNB1侧已成功删除 PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows和相关资源,可以向MN发送SN MODIFICATION COMMAND消息。该消息中包括通知MN维持双连接操作更新后可利用的P-UE能力和资源,和已成功回流PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows到MN侧的需求。然后MN重新建立回流的PDU Session1中的部分QoS Flows和相关无线资源,和P-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S204: 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from SN-gNB1, knows that SN-gNB1 has successfully deleted some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session1, and can send SN MODIFICATION COMMAND message to MN. This message includes the requirement to notify the MN to maintain the available P-UE capabilities and resources after the update of the dual connectivity operation, and to successfully return part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session 1 to the MN side. Then the MN re-establishes part of the QoS Flows and related radio resources in the returned PDU Session1, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
在S204之后:MN和P-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,继续维护P-RL无线链路,此后继续传输PDU Session2用户业务数据和部分回流的PDU Session1用户业务数据。SN-gNB1和S-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,继续维护S-RL无线链路,此后继续传输部分剩下的PDU Session1用户业务数据。After S204: MN and P-UE continue to maintain the P-RL radio link through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then continue to transmit PDU Session2 user service data and part of the returned PDU Session1 user service data. SN-gNB1 and S-UE continue to maintain the S-RL radio link through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then continue to transmit part of the remaining PDU and Session1 user service data.
应用示例3:MN发起释放或删除SN的流程。Application example 3: MN initiates the process of releasing or deleting SN.
如图16a所示:某LEO低轨卫星通讯系统中,若干颗LEO低轨卫星在特定的近地球轨道上。这些卫星可以按预定的星历信息,周期地绕着地球大圈运行。它们承载着完整的gNB基站功能(称为gNB型卫星),为地面用户UEs提供着卫星无线接入服务。地面上部署有若干个卫星地面站网关(NTN-GW)实体,它们集成在5GC核心网实体内。每颗LEO卫星依赖自身的定位能力,根据当前运行的物理经纬度位置,能够适时地和地面一个或多个NTN-GW/5GC分别建立和维持一条或多条Feeder link承载传输链接,用来承载传输NG接口连接实例。每颗LEO卫星可以对地面预定区域投射波束覆盖(图16a中大椭圆,通常覆盖半径远远大于地面基站的服务小区的覆盖)。随着LEO卫星的移动,这些卫星波束覆盖也在地面滑动,和陆基的地面蜂窝覆盖(图16a中小椭圆)形成异频重叠覆盖。As shown in Figure 16a: In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example. Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 16a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (small ellipse in Figure 16a).
如图16b所示,MN发起释放SN的流程可以包括以下步骤:As shown in Figure 16b, the process of MN initiating release of SN may include the following steps:
S300:T2之后的T3时刻,不断移动的卫星基站A-gNB1仍然锚点连接在NTN-GW/5GC1上,同时地面基站MN也锚点连接在相同的NTN-GW/5GC1上。MN和5GC1根据网管配置信息,都拥有该LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息。例如,即哪颗LEO卫星什么时间将运行到哪个轨道位置,该卫星对应的波束地面覆盖大概在哪个区域等。因此,MN和5GC1能够推测得知:在T3前后的一段观察时间内,卫星基站A-gNB1波束的地面覆盖和主基站MN的无线覆盖的重 叠将逐渐消失,从而UE需退出和卫星基站A-gNB1的地空双连接操作。MN可继续尝试和后面的卫星基站B-gNB2建立进入新的地空双连接操作。某已经处于地空双连接操作的UE正在同时被主基站MN小区(图16a中小椭圆)和辅基站SN-gNB1(图16a中大椭圆)所服务,已各自建立了PDU Session2和PDU Session1用户业务数据相关的无线资源和NG接口连接传输通道等。该UE支持本申请的P-UE和S-UE能力分割,并且已将更新后的能力分割信息上报给MN和5GC1。由于卫星基站A-gNB1的波束覆盖即将消失,PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows用户业务数据需全部回流到MN去继续承载传输,卫星基站A-gNB1也即将作为辅基站被删除。在步骤S300中,MN可以通过终端无线能力报告(UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT)消息或终端能力信息指示(UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION)消息,上报更新后的UE支持的P-UE和S-UE能力和资源分割的信息。S300: At time T3 after T2, the constantly moving satellite base station A-gNB1 is still anchored to the NTN-GW/5GC1, while the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1. Both MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will run to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover. Therefore, MN and 5GC1 can speculate that during the observation period before and after T3, the overlap between the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN will gradually disappear, and the UE needs to withdraw from the satellite base station A- Ground-air dual connection operation of gNB1. The MN can continue to try to establish a new ground-air dual connection operation with the following satellite base station B-gNB2. A UE that is already in ground-air dual connection operation is being served by the primary base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 16a) and secondary base station SN-gNB1 (large ellipse in Figure 16a) at the same time, and PDU Session 2 and PDU Session 1 user services have been established respectively Data-related wireless resources and NG interfaces are connected to transmission channels, etc. The UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of the application, and has reported the updated capability division information to the MN and 5GC1. Since the beam coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 is about to disappear, the remaining QoS Flows user service data in PDU Session1 needs to be returned to the MN to continue the bearer transmission, and the satellite base station A-gNB1 will also be deleted as a secondary base station. In step S300, the MN can report the updated P-UE and S-UE capabilities and resource division supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message. Information.
S301:MN根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息,不依赖于UE的RRM测量上报,在合适的时刻,向5GC1发送辅基站释放需求(SN RELEASE REQUIRED)消息。该消息中包括请求把当前SN-gNB1侧正在承载服务的PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows全部回流到MN承载传输,从而可删除掉作为UE辅基站的SN-gNB1,退出地空双连接操作。MN同时还可以建议做数据前传Data Forwarding操作,在上述消息中提供相应的数据前传传输地址信息,以减少回流操作中的数据丢包。S301: According to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system, the MN does not rely on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and at an appropriate time, sends a SN RELEASE REQUIRED message to the 5GC1. The message includes a request to return all the remaining QoS Flows in the PDU Session1 currently being served by the SN-gNB1 side to the MN bearer for transmission, so that the SN-gNB1 as the UE secondary base station can be deleted and the ground-air dual connection operation can be exited. At the same time, the MN can also recommend the Data Forwarding operation, and provide the corresponding data forwarding transmission address information in the above message to reduce data packet loss in the return operation.
S302:5GC1接收到MN的需求消息,根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息和系统本地策略,判定可以将PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows全部回流到MN。5GC1向目标SN-gNB1发送辅基站释放命令(SN RELEASE COMMAND)消息。该消息中包括通知目标SN-gNB1释放,请求删除掉SN-gNB1侧服务PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S302: 5GC1 receives the demand message of the MN, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that all remaining QoS Flows in PDU Session1 can be returned to the MN. 5GC1 sends a secondary base station release command (SN RELEASE COMMAND) message to the target SN-gNB1. The message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 to release, requesting to delete the remaining QoS Flows related radio resources in the SN-gNB1 side service PDU Session1, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
S303:SN-gNB1接收到5GC1的请求消息,可以删除掉待回流的PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows和全部相关资源,完成后向5GC1发送辅基站释放响应消息例如:辅基站释放完成(SN RELEASE COMPLETE)消息。该消息中 包括通知5GC1自己已成功删除PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows和全部相关资源,已删除掉作为UE辅基站的SN-gNB1。SN-gNB1还可针对回流的剩余QoS Flows进行数据前传(Data Forwarding)操作。S303: SN-gNB1 receives the request message of 5GC1, can delete the remaining QoS Flows and all related resources in the PDU to be returned to Session1, and send a secondary base station release response message to 5GC1 after completion, for example: secondary base station release complete (SN RELEASE COMPLETE )news. This message includes notifying 5GC1 that it has successfully deleted the remaining QoS Flows and all related resources in PDU Session 1 and that SN-gNB1, which is the secondary base station of the UE, has been deleted. SN-gNB1 can also perform data forwarding (Data Forwarding) for the remaining QoS Flows returned.
S304:5GC1接收到SN-gNB1的释放完成消息,得知SN-gNB1已成功删除了PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows和全部相关资源,从而向MN发送辅基站释放命令(SN RELEASE COMMAND)消息。该消息中包括通知MN退出双连接操作后可利用的整个UE能力和已成功回流PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows到MN侧的需求。然后MN重新建立回流的PDU Session1中的剩余QoS Flows和相关无线资源,和P-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S304: 5GC1 receives the release completion message of SN-gNB1, and learns that SN-gNB1 has successfully deleted the remaining QoS Flows and all related resources in PDU Session1, and thus sends a secondary base station release command (SN RELEASE COMMAND) message to the MN. The message includes the requirement to notify the MN to quit the dual connectivity operation of the entire UE capabilities that can be used and the remaining QoS Flows in PDU Session 1 to the MN side. Then the MN re-establishes the remaining QoS Flows and related radio resources in the returned PDU Session1, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
在S304之后:MN和UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,继续维护P-RL无线链路,此后继续传输PDU Session2用户业务数据和已全部回流的PDU Session1用户业务数据。SN-gNB1和S-UE之间通过RRC释放消息,删除掉原来的S-RL无线链路,此后SN-gNB1不再服务传输任何的PDU Session用户业务数据。After S304: the MN and the UE continue to maintain the P-RL radio link through the RRC reconfiguration message, and then continue to transmit PDU Session2 user service data and all reflowed PDU Session1 user service data. The RRC release message is used between SN-gNB1 and S-UE to delete the original S-RL radio link. After that, SN-gNB1 no longer serves to transmit any PDU and Session user service data.
本应用示例中的释放(RELEASE)有时也称为删除(DELETE)。相应的,与释放相关的消息,也可以修改为与删除相关的消息。例如,辅基站删除需求(SN DELETE REQUIRED)消息、辅基站删除命令(SN DELETE COMMAND)消息、辅基站删除成功(SN DELETE COMPLETE)消息等。以下其他应用示例中也是类似的情况,不再赘述。The release (RELEASE) in this application example is sometimes also called delete (DELETE). Correspondingly, the message related to release can also be modified to the message related to deletion. For example, a secondary base station delete request (SN DELETE REQUIRED) message, a secondary base station delete command (SN DELETE COMMAND) message, a secondary base station delete success (SN DELETE COMPLETE) message, etc. The following other application examples are similar situations, so I won't repeat them.
应用示例4:5GC发起建立或添加SN的流程。Application example 4: 5GC initiates the process of establishing or adding SN.
如图17a所示:某LEO低轨卫星通讯系统中,若干颗LEO低轨卫星在特定的近地球轨道上。这些卫星可以按预定的星历信息,周期地绕着地球大圈运行。它们承载着完整的gNB基站功能(称为gNB型卫星),为地面用户UEs提供着卫星无线接入服务。地面上部署有若干个卫星地面站网关(NTN-GW)实体,它们集成在5GC核心网实体内。每颗LEO卫星依赖自身的定位能力,根据当前运行的物理经纬度位置,能够适时地和地面一个或多个NTN-GW/5GC分别建立和维持一条或多条Feeder link承载传输链接,用来承载传输NG接口连接实例。每颗LEO卫星可以对地面预定区域投射波束覆盖(图17a中大椭圆,通常覆盖半径远远大于地面基站的服务小区的覆盖)。随着LEO卫星的移动,这些卫星 波束覆盖也在地面滑动,和陆基的地面蜂窝覆盖(图17a中小椭圆)形成异频重叠覆盖。在步骤S400中,MN可以通过终端无线能力报告(UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT)消息或终端能力信息指示(UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION)消息,上报和协同UE支持的P-UE和S-UE能力分割的信息。As shown in Figure 17a: In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example. Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 17a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with the ground-based cellular coverage (small ellipse in Figure 17a). In step S400, the MN can report and coordinate the information of the P-UE and S-UE capability division supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message.
如图17b所示,5GC发起添加SN的流程可以包括以下步骤:As shown in Figure 17b, the process of adding SN initiated by 5GC may include the following steps:
S400:T1时刻,卫星基站A-gNB1锚点连接在NTN-GW/5GC1上,同时地面基站MN也锚点连接在相同的NTN-GW/5GC1上。MN和5GC1根据网管配置信息,拥有该LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息。例如,即哪颗LEO卫星什么时间将运行到哪个轨道位置,该卫星对应的波束地面覆盖大概在哪个区域。等。因此,MN和5GC1都能推测得知:在T1前后的一段观察时间内,卫星基站A-gNB1波束的地面覆盖和主基站MN的无线覆盖有一定的重叠,从而可能进行地空双连接操作。某处于连接态的UE正在被主基站MN小区(图17a中小椭圆)服务,已建立了PDU Session1和PDU Session2用户业务数据相关的无线资源和NG接口连接传输通道等。该UE支持本申请的P-UE和S-UE能力分割,并且将可支持的能力分割信息上报给MN和5GC1。根据系统本地策略(比如:漫游安全或计费因素),PDU Session2用户业务数据可被LEO卫星无线链路承载传输。S400: At T1, the anchor point of the satellite base station A-gNB1 is connected to the NTN-GW/5GC1, and the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1. MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and which area the beam corresponding to the satellite will cover. Wait. Therefore, both MN and 5GC1 can speculate that during a period of observation time before and after T1, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN overlap to a certain extent, so that the ground-air dual connection operation may be performed. A UE in a connected state is being served by the main base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 17a), and radio resources related to user service data of PDU Session1 and PDU Session2 and NG interface connection transmission channels have been established. The UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the supportable capability division information to the MN and 5GC1. According to the system's local policy (such as roaming security or billing factors), PDU Session2 user service data can be carried and transmitted by the LEO satellite radio link.
S401:5GC1根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息和系统本地策略,判定可以将PDU Session2中所有的QoS Flows分流到目标SN-gNB1,从而在合适的时刻,5GC1直接向目标SN-gNB1发送辅基站添加请求(SN ADDITION REQUEST)消息。该消息中包括通知目标SN-gNB1可利用的S-UE能力,请求在SN-gNB1侧建立PDU Session1相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S401: Based on the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, 5GC1 determines that all QoS Flows in PDU Session 2 can be diverted to the target SN-gNB1, so that at a suitable moment, 5GC1 directly sends the auxiliary to the target SN-gNB1 Base station addition request (SN ADDITION REQUEST) message. This message includes notifying the target SN-gNB1 of the available S-UE capabilities, requesting the establishment of PDU and Session1 related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
S402:SN-gNB1接收到5GC1的请求消息,进行本地资源接纳控制。如果SN-gNB1判定可为PDU Session2成功建立所有相关资源,可以向5GC1发送辅基站添加响应消息,例如辅基站添加确认(SN ADDITION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE)消息。该消息中包括通知5GC1已成功建立PDU Session2,以及SN-gNB1侧的相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输 资源等。SN-gNB1还可以同时提供做数据前传(Data Forwarding)的传输地址信息,以实现从MN侧来的数据前传操作。S402: SN-gNB1 receives the 5GC1 request message and performs local resource admission control. If SN-gNB1 determines that all relevant resources can be successfully established for PDU Session2, it can send a secondary base station addition response message to 5GC1, such as a secondary base station addition confirmation (SN ADDITION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message. This message includes notifying 5GC1 that PDU Session2 has been successfully established, as well as related radio resources on the SN-gNB1 side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface. SN-gNB1 can also provide transmission address information for data forwarding at the same time, so as to realize the data forwarding operation from the MN side.
S403:5GC1接收到SN-gNB1的确认消息,得知SN-gNB1侧已成功分流建立PDU Session2,可以向MN发送辅基站添加命令(SN ADDITION COMMAND)消息。该消息中包括通知MN进入双连接操作后可利用的P-UE能力和资源,和已成功分流PDU Session2到SN-gNB1侧的结果。然后MN可删除掉原来服务PDU Session2的相关无线资源,和P-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S403: 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from SN-gNB1, knows that the SN-gNB1 side has successfully offloaded to establish PDU Session2, and can send a secondary base station add command (SN ADDITION COMMAND) message to the MN. The message includes the P-UE capabilities and resources available to the MN informing the MN after entering the dual connectivity operation, and the result of successfully offloading PDU Session2 to the SN-gNB1 side. Then the MN can delete the related radio resources of the original service PDU Session2, the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
在S403之后:MN和P-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,建立且维护P-RL无线链路,此后仅传输PDU Session1用户业务数据。SN-gNB1和S-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,建立且维护S-RL无线链路,此后仅传输PDU Session2用户业务数据。After S403: the P-RL radio link is established and maintained through the RRC reconfiguration message between the MN and the P-UE, and then only the PDU Session1 user service data is transmitted. SN-gNB1 and S-UE establish and maintain S-RL radio links through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then only transmit PDU and Session2 user service data.
应用示例5:SN发起修改SN的流程。Application example 5: SN initiates the process of modifying SN.
如图18a所示:某LEO低轨卫星通讯系统中,若干颗LEO低轨卫星在特定的近地球轨道上。这些卫星可以按预定的星历信息,周期地绕着地球大圈运行。它们承载着完整的gNB基站功能(称为gNB型卫星),为地面用户UEs提供着卫星无线接入服务。地面上部署有若干个卫星地面站网关(NTN-GW)实体,它们集成在5GC核心网实体内。每颗LEO卫星依赖自身的定位能力,根据当前运行的物理经纬度位置,能够适时地和地面一个或多个NTN-GW/5GC分别建立和维持一条或多条Feeder link承载传输链接,用来承载传输NG接口连接实例。每颗LEO卫星可以对地面预定区域投射波束覆盖(图18a中大椭圆,通常覆盖半径远远大于地面基站的服务小区的覆盖)。随着LEO卫星的移动,这些卫星波束覆盖也在地面滑动,和陆基的地面蜂窝覆盖(图18a中小椭圆)形成异频重叠覆盖。As shown in Figure 18a: In a LEO low-orbit satellite communication system, several LEO low-orbit satellites are in specific near-earth orbits. These satellites can orbit the Earth's circle periodically according to predetermined ephemeris information. They carry complete gNB base station functions (called gNB satellites) and provide satellite wireless access services for ground users UEs. There are several satellite ground station gateway (NTN-GW) entities deployed on the ground, which are integrated in the 5GC core network entity. Each LEO satellite relies on its own positioning capability, and can establish and maintain one or more Feeder link bearer links with one or more NTN-GW/5GCs on the ground according to the current physical latitude and longitude position. NG interface connection example. Each LEO satellite can project beam coverage to a predetermined area on the ground (the large ellipse in Figure 18a, usually with a coverage radius much larger than the coverage of the service cell of the ground base station). With the movement of LEO satellites, the beam coverage of these satellites also slides on the ground, forming inter-frequency overlapping coverage with land-based ground cellular coverage (the small ellipse in Figure 18a).
如图18b所示,SN发起修改SN的流程可以包括以下步骤:As shown in Figure 18b, the process of SN initiating modification of SN can include the following steps:
S500:T1之后的T2时刻,不断移动的卫星基站A-gNB1仍然锚点连接在NTN-GW/5GC1上,同时地面基站MN也锚点连接在相同的NTN-GW/5GC1上。MN和5GC1根据网管配置信息,拥有该LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息。例如, 哪颗LEO卫星什么时间将运行到哪个轨道位置,其对应的波束地面覆盖大概在哪个区域等。因此,MN和5GC1能够推测得知:在T2前后的一段观察时间内,卫星基站A-gNB1波束的地面覆盖和主基站MN的无线覆盖仍然有一定的重叠,从而可以继续维持地空双连接操作。某已经处于地空双连接操作的UE正在同时被主基站MN小区(图18a中小椭圆)和辅基站SN-gNB1(图18a中大椭圆)所服务,已各自建立了PDU Session1和PDU Session2用户业务数据相关的无线资源和NG接口连接传输通道等。该UE支持本申请的P-UE和S-UE能力分割,并且将更新后的能力分割信息上报给MN和5GC1。由于SN-gNB1卫星本地负荷过重的因素,SN-gNB1希望把PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows用户业务数据回流到MN去继续承载传输。在步骤S500中,MN可以通过终端无线能力报告(UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT)消息或终端能力信息指示(UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION)消息,上报更新后的UE支持的P-UE和S-UE能力分割的信息。S500: At time T2 after T1, the constantly moving satellite base station A-gNB1 is still anchored to the NTN-GW/5GC1, while the ground base station MN is also anchored to the same NTN-GW/5GC1. MN and 5GC1 have the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system according to the network management configuration information. For example, which LEO satellite will travel to which orbital position at what time, and in which area its corresponding beam ground coverage is probably. Therefore, MN and 5GC1 can infer that during the observation period before and after T2, the ground coverage of the satellite base station A-gNB1 beam and the wireless coverage of the main base station MN still overlap to a certain extent, so that the ground-air dual connection operation can be maintained. . A UE that is already in ground-air dual connection operation is being served by the primary base station MN cell (small ellipse in Figure 18a) and secondary base station SN-gNB1 (large ellipse in Figure 18a) at the same time, and has established PDU Session 1 and PDU Session 2 user services Data-related wireless resources and NG interfaces are connected to transmission channels, etc. The UE supports the P-UE and S-UE capability division of this application, and reports the updated capability division information to the MN and 5GC1. Due to the local overload of the SN-gNB1 satellite, SN-gNB1 hopes to return part of the QoS Flows user service data in PDU Session 2 to the MN to continue the bearer transmission. In step S500, the MN can report the updated P-UE and S-UE capability split information supported by the UE through a terminal radio capability report (UE RADIO CAPABILITY REPORT) message or a terminal capability information indication (UE CAPABILITY INFO INDICATION) message .
S501:SN-gNB1根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息,不依赖于UE的RRM测量上报,在合适的时刻向5GC1主动发送辅基站修改需求(SN MODIFICATION REQUIRED)消息。该消息中包括请求把当前SN-gNB1侧正在承载服务的PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows回流到MN去承载传输。SN-gNB1同时还可以建议做数据前传(Data Forwarding)操作,以减少回流操作中的数据丢包。S501: According to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system, SN-gNB1 does not rely on the RRM measurement report of the UE, and actively sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUIRED) message to the 5GC1 at an appropriate time. The message includes a request to return part of the QoS Flows in the PDU Session2 currently carrying the service on the SN-gNB1 side to the MN for bearer transmission. SN-gNB1 can also suggest data forwarding (Data Forwarding) operation to reduce data packet loss in the return operation.
S502:5GC1接收到SN-gNB1的请求消息,根据LEO低轨卫星系统的星历信息和系统本地策略,判定可以将PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows回流到MN。5GC1向MN发送辅基站修改请求(SN MODIFICATION REQUEST)消息。该消息中包括通知MN更新后可利用的P-UE能力和资源,请求在MN侧重配置回流的部分PDU Session2相关无线资源,和P-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S502: 5GC1 receives the request message from SN-gNB1, and according to the ephemeris information of the LEO low-orbit satellite system and the system's local policy, determines that part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session 2 can be returned to the MN. 5GC1 sends a secondary base station modification request (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST) message to the MN. The message includes notifying the MN of the available P-UE capabilities and resources after the update, requesting that the MN focus on configuring some of the reflowed PDUs and Session2 related radio resources, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface.
S503:MN接收到5GC1的请求消息。如果成功建立回流的PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows和相关资源,可以向5GC1发送辅基站修改响应消息,例如辅基站修改确认(SN MODIFICATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE)消息。该消息中包括通知5GC1已成功建立PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows和相关资 源,成功重配置MN侧的相关无线资源,和P-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。MN还可针对回流的部分QoS Flows在上述消息中提供数据前传(Data Forwarding)传输地址信息。S503: The MN receives the request message of 5GC1. If part of the QoS Flows and related resources in the returned PDU Session 2 are successfully established, a secondary base station modification response message, such as a secondary base station modification confirmation (SN MODIFICATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE) message, can be sent to the 5GC1. This message includes notifying 5GC1 that it has successfully established some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session2, successfully reconfiguring related radio resources on the MN side, and the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the P-NG interface. The MN can also provide data forwarding (Data Forwarding) transmission address information in the above message for some of the returned QoS Flows.
S504:5GC1接收到MN的确认消息,得知MN侧已成功建立PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows和相关资源,向SN-gNB1发送辅基站修改命令(SN MODIFICATION COMMAND)消息。该消息中包括通知SN-gNB1继续维持双连接操作更新后可利用的S-UE能力和已成功回流PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows到MN侧的结果。然后SN-gNB1删除掉回流的PDU Session2中的部分QoS Flows和相关无线资源,和S-NG接口连接的控制面、用户面和传输资源等。S504: 5GC1 receives the confirmation message from the MN, learns that the MN side has successfully established some QoS Flows and related resources in PDU Session2, and sends a secondary base station modification command (SN MODIFICATION COMMAND) message to SN-gNB1. The message includes the result of notifying SN-gNB1 to continue to maintain the available S-UE capabilities after the dual-connection operation is updated, and to successfully return part of the QoS Flows in PDU Session 2 to the MN side. Then SN-gNB1 deletes part of the QoS Flows and related radio resources in the returned PDU Session2, as well as the control plane, user plane, and transmission resources connected to the S-NG interface.
在S504之后:MN和P-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,继续维护P-RL无线链路,此后继续传输PDU Session1用户业务数据和部分回流的PDU Session2用户业务数据。SN-gNB1和S-UE之间通过RRC重配置消息,继续维护S-RL无线链路,此后继续传输部分剩下的PDU Session2用户业务数据。After S504: The MN and the P-UE continue to maintain the P-RL radio link through the RRC reconfiguration message, and then continue to transmit PDU Session1 user service data and part of the returned PDU Session2 user service data. SN-gNB1 and S-UE continue to maintain the S-RL radio link through RRC reconfiguration messages, and then continue to transmit part of the remaining PDU and Session2 user service data.
图19为本申请一实施例提供的连接装置的结构示意图。该装置可以设置在核心网网元中。如图19所示,该装置可以包括:第一发送模块71,用于向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改或删除;第一接收模块72,用于接收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by an embodiment of the application. The device can be set in the core network element. As shown in FIG. 19, the device may include: a first sending module 71, configured to send a first indication message to the target secondary base station, where the first indication message includes a secondary message between the target secondary base station and the target terminal. First instruction information for connecting to perform a specified operation, where the specified operation includes establishing, adding, modifying, or deleting; the first receiving module 72 is configured to receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, the first response message Includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
在一种实施方式中,如图20所示,该装置还包括:第二接收模块73,用于接收来自主基站的第一需求消息,所述第一需求消息是所述主基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下发送的,所述第一需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第一需求信息,所述第一需求信息包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放的需求信息。In an implementation manner, as shown in FIG. 20, the device further includes: a second receiving module 73, configured to receive a first demand message from the primary base station, where the first demand message is that the primary base station detects Sent when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations changes, the first demand message includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the first demand information It includes required information for the establishment, addition, modification, deletion or release of the auxiliary connection.
在一种实施方式中,该装置还包括:第二发送模块74,用于在所述第一结果信息表示指定操作成功的情况下,向所述主基站发送第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息中包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。In an implementation manner, the device further includes: a second sending module 74, configured to send a second indication message to the primary base station when the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful, and the second The instruction message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
在一种实施方式中,该装置还包括:第三接收模块75,用于接收来自目标辅基站的第二需求消息,所述第二需求消息是所述目标辅基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下发送的,所述第二需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第二需求信息,所述第二需求信息包括针对辅连接的修改、删除或释放的需求信息;第三发送模块76,用于向主基站发送第三指示消息,所述第三指示消息中包括与所述第二需求信息对应的主连接命令信息;第四接收模块77,用于接收来自所述主基站的第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息中包括与所述主连接命令信息对应的第二结果信息。In an implementation manner, the device further includes: a third receiving module 75, configured to receive a second demand message from a target secondary base station, where the second demand message is when the target secondary base station detects the target terminal Sent when the wireless connection status with multiple base stations changes, the second demand message includes second demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the second demand information includes The third sending module 76 is configured to send a third instruction message to the primary base station, where the third instruction message includes the primary connection command information corresponding to the second demand information; The fourth receiving module 77 is configured to receive a second response message from the main base station, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the main connection command information.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站建立请求消息或辅基站添加请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first indication message is a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message, and the first indication information includes the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need for offloading User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要从目标辅基站回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an embodiment, the first indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information includes user service feature information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re-distributed to the target secondary base station. User service characteristic information.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the first indication information includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站建立需求消息或辅基站添加需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an embodiment, the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中所述第一需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the first demand message includes remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站建立命令消息或辅基站添加命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源 信息,以及已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the second indication message is a secondary base station setup command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the second indication message is a secondary base station modification command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In one embodiment, the second indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息;所述第三指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息;所述第一指示信息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第一指示消息中包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及已回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。In an embodiment, the second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station; the third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message The third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service feature information that needs to be returned to the primary base station; the first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first The indication message includes the available auxiliary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;所述第三指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;所述第一指示信息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示消息中需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In an embodiment, the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted; The third indication message is the secondary base station release command message or the secondary base station delete command message. The third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the remaining users on the target secondary base station that need to be returned to the primary base station Service characteristic information; the first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
图21为本申请另一实施例提供的连接装置的结构示意图。该装置可以设置在接入网网元中。如图21所示,该装置可以包括:第五接收模块81,用于接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息中包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改或删除;执行模块82,用于对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作;第五发送模块83,用于向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a connection device provided by another embodiment of the application. The device can be set in the network element of the access network. As shown in FIG. 21, the apparatus may include: a fifth receiving module 81, configured to receive a first indication message from a core network element, where the first indication message includes a secondary base station and a target terminal. First instruction information for the connection to perform a specified operation, where the specified operation includes establishment, addition, modification or deletion; an execution module 82, configured to perform the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal The fifth sending module 83 is configured to send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
在一种实施方式中,如图22所示,该装置还包括:第六发送模块84,用于在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下,向所述核心网网元发送第一需求消息,所述第一需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第一需求信息,所述第一需求消息包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放的需求。In an implementation manner, as shown in FIG. 22, the device further includes: a sixth sending module 84, configured to send notification to the target terminal when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed The core network element sends a first demand message, the first demand message includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the first demand message includes the establishment and addition of the secondary connection. , Modification, deletion or release requirements.
在一种实施方式中,该装置还包括:第六接收模块85,用于接收来自所述核心网网元的第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息是在所述核心网网元在所述第一结果信息表示指定操作成功的情况下发送的,所述第二指示消息中包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。In an embodiment, the device further includes: a sixth receiving module 85, configured to receive a second indication message from the core network element, where the second indication message is when the core network element is located at all The first result information indicates that it is sent when the specified operation is successful, and the second indication message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
在一种实施方式中,该装置还包括:第七发送模块86,用于在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下,向所述核心网网元发送第二需求消息,所述第二需求消息中包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第二需求信息,所述第二需求信息包括针对所述辅连接的修改、删除或释放的需求。In an implementation manner, the device further includes: a seventh sending module 86, configured to send the first sending module to the core network element when the wireless connection status between the target terminal and the multiple base stations has changed. 2. A demand message. The second demand message includes second demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the second demand information includes a demand for modification, deletion, or release of the secondary connection.
在一种实施方式中,该装置还包括:第七接收模块87,用于接收来自所述核心网网元的第三指示消息,所述第三指示消息中包括与所述第二需求信息对应的主连接命令信息;第八发送模块88,用于向所述核心网网元发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息中包括与所述主连接命令信息对应的第二结果信息。In an implementation manner, the device further includes: a seventh receiving module 87, configured to receive a third indication message from the core network element, where the third indication message includes information corresponding to the second demand information The eighth sending module 88 is configured to send a second response message to the core network element, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the main connection command information.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站建立请求消息或辅基站添加请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first indication message is a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message, and the first indication information includes the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need for offloading User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要从目标辅基站回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an embodiment, the first indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information includes user service feature information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re-distributed to the target secondary base station. User service characteristic information.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the first indication information includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站建立需求消息或辅基站添 加需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an embodiment, the first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or secondary base station addition demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station .
在一种实施方式中,所述第一需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the first demand message includes remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站建立命令消息或辅基站添加命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the second indication message is a secondary base station setup command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and offloaded User service characteristic information to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。In an implementation manner, the second indication message is a secondary base station modification command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristics that need to be returned to the primary base station Information, or user service characteristic information that has been diverted to the target secondary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In one embodiment, the second indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return User service characteristic information remaining on the target secondary base station to the primary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息;In an implementation manner, the second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station;
所述第三指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息;The third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station;
所述第一指示信息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第一指示消息中包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及已回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。The first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
在一种实施方式中,所述第二需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;所述第三指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息, 所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;所述第一指示信息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示消息中需要删除的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。In an embodiment, the second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes user service feature information remaining on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted; The third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message. The third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the remaining users on the target secondary base station that need to be returned to the primary base station Service characteristic information; the first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service characteristic information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
在一种实施方式中,执行模块还用于根据所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息,建立与所述目标终端的辅连接,以将所述用户业务分流到目标辅基站,以使目标辅基站继续承载传输。In an embodiment, the execution module is further configured to establish an auxiliary connection with the target terminal according to the available auxiliary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target auxiliary base station, The user service is offloaded to the target secondary base station, so that the target secondary base station continues to carry the transmission.
在一种实施方式中,执行模块还用于将需要回流的用户业务承载传输资源从目标辅基站删除,或为重新分流的用户业务分配新承载传输资源。In an implementation manner, the execution module is also used to delete user service bearer transmission resources that need to be returned from the target secondary base station, or allocate new bearer transmission resources for re-offloaded user services.
在一种实施方式中,执行模块还用于将剩余的用户业务承载传输资源从目标辅基站删除,并释放或删除所述目标辅基站。In an implementation manner, the execution module is further configured to delete the remaining user service bearer transmission resources from the target secondary base station, and release or delete the target secondary base station.
本申请实施例各装置中的各模块的功能可以参见上述方法实施例中的对应描述,在此不再赘述。For the functions of the modules in the devices in the embodiments of the present application, reference may be made to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
图23为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,如图23所示,本申请实施例提供的网络设备130包括:存储器1303与处理器1304。所述网络设备130还可以包括接口1301和总线1302。所述接口1301、存储器1303与处理器1304通过总线1302相连接。所述存储器1303用于存储指令。所述处理器1304被配置为读取所述指令以执行上述应用于接入网网元的方法实施例的技术方案,其实现原理和技术效果类似,此处不再赘述。FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG. 23, the network device 130 provided by an embodiment of the present application includes a memory 1303 and a processor 1304. The network device 130 may further include an interface 1301 and a bus 1302. The interface 1301, the memory 1303 and the processor 1304 are connected through a bus 1302. The memory 1303 is used to store instructions. The processor 1304 is configured to read the instructions to execute the technical solutions of the foregoing method embodiments applied to an access network element. The implementation principles and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图24为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,如图24所示,本申请实施例提供的网络设备140包括:存储器1403与处理器1404。所述网络设备还可以包括接口1401和总线1402。所述接口1401、存储器1403与处理器1404通过总线1402相连接。所述存储器1403用于存储指令。所述处理器1404被配置为读取所述指令以执行上述应用于核心网网元的方法实施例的技术方案,其实现原理和技术效果类似,此处不再赘述。FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG. 24, a network device 140 provided by an embodiment of this application includes a memory 1403 and a processor 1404. The network device may also include an interface 1401 and a bus 1402. The interface 1401, the memory 1403 and the processor 1404 are connected through a bus 1402. The memory 1403 is used to store instructions. The processor 1404 is configured to read the instructions to execute the technical solutions of the foregoing method embodiments applied to core network elements. The implementation principles and technical effects are similar and will not be repeated here.
图25为本申请实施例提供的通信系统结构示意图,如图25所示,该系统包括:如上述实施例的网络设备130、以及上述实施例的网络设备140。FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG. 25, the system includes: a network device 130 according to the above-mentioned embodiment and a network device 140 according to the above-mentioned embodiment.
本申请提供一种存储介质,所述存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述实施例中的方法。The present application provides a storage medium that stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the method in the foregoing embodiment is implemented.
以上所述,仅为本申请的较佳实施例而已,并非用于限定本申请的保护范围。The above are only the preferred embodiments of the present application, and are not used to limit the protection scope of the present application.
一般来说,本申请的多种实施例可以在硬件或专用电路、软件、逻辑或其任何组合中实现。例如,一些方面可以被实现在硬件中,而其它方面可以被实现在可以被控制器、微处理器或其它计算装置执行的固件或软件中,尽管本申请不限于此。In general, the various embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or dedicated circuits, software, logic or any combination thereof. For example, some aspects may be implemented in hardware, while other aspects may be implemented in firmware or software that may be executed by a controller, microprocessor or other computing device, although the application is not limited thereto.
本申请的实施例可以通过移动装置的数据处理器执行计算机程序指令来实现,例如在处理器实体中,或者通过硬件,或者通过软件和硬件的组合。计算机程序指令可以是汇编指令、指令集架构(ISA)指令、机器指令、机器相关指令、微代码、固件指令、状态设置数据、或者以一种或多种编程语言的任意组合编写的源代码或目标代码。The embodiments of the present application may be implemented by executing computer program instructions by a data processor of a mobile device, for example, in a processor entity, or by hardware, or by a combination of software and hardware. Computer program instructions can be assembly instructions, instruction set architecture (ISA) instructions, machine instructions, machine-related instructions, microcode, firmware instructions, state setting data, or source code written in any combination of one or more programming languages or Target code.
本申请附图中的任何逻辑流程的框图可以表示程序步骤,或者可以表示相互连接的逻辑电路、模块和功能,或者可以表示程序步骤与逻辑电路、模块和功能的组合。计算机程序可以存储在存储器上。存储器可以具有任何适合于本地技术环境的类型并且可以使用任何适合的数据存储技术实现。本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存等。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。RAM可以包括多种形式,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线 随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。本申请描述的系统和方法的存储器包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。The block diagram of any logical flow in the drawings of the present application may represent program steps, or may represent interconnected logic circuits, modules, and functions, or may represent a combination of program steps and logic circuits, modules, and functions. The computer program can be stored on the memory. The memory can be of any type suitable for the local technical environment and can be implemented using any suitable data storage technology. The memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory, etc. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), which is used as an external cache. RAM can include many forms, such as static random access memory (Static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronization Dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access Memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM). The memory of the system and method described in this application includes but is not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.
本申请实施例的处理器可以是任何适合于本地技术环境的类型,例如但不限于通用计算机、专用计算机、微处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程逻辑器件(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FGPA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件、或者基于多核处理器架构的处理器。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者也可以是任何常规的处理器等。上述的处理器可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法的步骤。软件模块可以位于随机存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The processor of the embodiment of the present application may be of any type suitable for the local technical environment, such as but not limited to general-purpose computers, special-purpose computers, microprocessors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processors, DSP), and application specific integrated circuits (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), Field-Programmable Gate Array (FGPA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, or processors based on multi-core processor architecture. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The foregoing processor may implement or execute the steps of each method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. The software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
通过示范性和非限制性的示例,上文已提供了对本申请的示范实施例的详细描述。但结合附图和权利要求来考虑,对以上实施例的多种修改和调整对本领域技术人员来说是显而易见的,但不偏离本申请的范围。因此,本申请的恰当范围将根据权利要求确定。By way of exemplary and non-limiting examples, a detailed description of the exemplary embodiments of the present application has been provided above. However, considering the accompanying drawings and claims, various modifications and adjustments to the above embodiments are obvious to those skilled in the art, but they do not deviate from the scope of the present application. Therefore, the proper scope of the application will be determined according to the claims.

Claims (38)

  1. 一种连接方法,包括:A connection method includes:
    向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息包括对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改、删除或释放;Send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the designated operation includes establishing, adding, and modifying , Delete or release;
    接收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。Receiving a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:
    接收来自主基站的第一需求消息,所述第一需求消息是所述主基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下发送的,所述第一需求消息包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第一需求信息,所述第一需求信息包括针对所述辅连接的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放的需求信息。Receiving a first demand message from a primary base station, the first demand message being sent by the primary base station upon detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, the first demand message It includes first demand information for performing the specified operation on the auxiliary connection, and the first demand information includes demand information for the establishment, addition, modification, deletion, or release of the auxiliary connection.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising:
    在所述第一结果信息表示所述指定操作成功的情况下,向主基站发送第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。In a case where the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful, a second indication message is sent to the master base station, where the second indication message includes the first result information and the master corresponding to the first result information. Connection command information.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:
    接收来自所述目标辅基站的第二需求消息,所述第二需求消息是所述目标辅基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下发送的,所述第二需求消息包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第二需求信息,所述第二需求信息包括针对辅连接的修改、删除或释放的需求信息;Receiving a second demand message from the target secondary base station, the second demand message being sent by the target secondary base station upon detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, and The second demand message includes second demand information for performing the specified operation on the secondary connection, and the second demand information includes demand information for modification, deletion, or release of the secondary connection;
    向主基站发送第三指示消息,所述第三指示消息包括与所述第二需求信息对应的主连接命令信息;Sending a third instruction message to the primary base station, where the third instruction message includes primary connection command information corresponding to the second demand information;
    接收来自所述主基站的第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息包括与所述主连接命令信息对应的第二结果信息。Receiving a second response message from the primary base station, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the primary connection command information.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站建立请求消息或辅基站添加请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication message is a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message, and the first indication information includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal , And user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站修改请求 消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要从所述目标辅基站回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or restart User service feature information shunted to the target secondary base station.
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the first indication information includes remaining user services on the target secondary base station that need to be deleted Characteristic information.
  8. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 2, wherein:
    所述第一需求消息为辅基站建立需求消息或辅基站添加需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  9. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 2, wherein:
    所述第一需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要回流到所述主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
  10. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 2, wherein:
    所述第一需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station deletion demand message, and the first demand message includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  11. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站建立命令消息或辅基站添加命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及已分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 3, wherein the second indication message is a secondary base station setup command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal , And user service characteristic information that has been offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  12. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及已分流到目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 3, wherein the second indication message is a secondary base station modification command message, and the second indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return to the primary The user service feature information of the base station, or the second indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the user service feature information that has been offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  13. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 3, wherein the second indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal , And the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
  14. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 4, wherein:
    所述第二需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要回流到所述主基站的用户业务特征信息;The second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station;
    所述第三指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到所述主基站的用户业务特征信息;The third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station;
    所述第一指示信息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第一指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及已回流到所述主基站的用户业务特征信息。The first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
  15. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 4, wherein:
    所述第二需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;The second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted;
    所述第三指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到所述主基站的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;The third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and all the information that needs to be returned to the primary base station. The remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station;
    所述第一指示信息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示消息包括需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the first indication message includes the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  16. 一种连接方法,包括:A connection method includes:
    目标辅基站接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改、删除或释放;The target secondary base station receives a first indication message from the core network element, where the first indication message includes first indication information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the specified operation includes establishing, Add, modify, delete or release;
    所述目标辅基站对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作;Performing the designated operation by the target secondary base station on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal;
    所述目标辅基站向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。The target secondary base station sends a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,还包括:The method according to claim 16, further comprising:
    主基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下,向所述核心网网元发送第一需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第一需求信息,所述第一需求消息包括针对所述辅连接 的建立、添加、修改、删除或释放的需求消息。Upon detecting that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, the primary base station sends a first demand message to the core network element, where the first demand message includes the execution of the secondary connection The first demand information of the specified operation, the first demand message includes a demand message for the establishment, addition, modification, deletion, or release of the secondary connection.
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,还包括:The method according to claim 16, further comprising:
    主基站接收来自所述核心网网元的第二指示消息,所述第二指示消息是在所述核心网网元在所述第一结果信息表示指定操作成功的情况下发送的,所述第二指示消息包括所述第一结果信息和与所述第一结果信息对应的主连接命令信息。The primary base station receives a second indication message from the core network element, and the second indication message is sent by the core network element when the first result information indicates that the specified operation is successful. The second indication message includes the first result information and main connection command information corresponding to the first result information.
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,还包括:The method according to claim 16, further comprising:
    所述目标辅基站在检测到所述目标终端与多个基站的无线连接状态发生变化的情况下,向所述核心网网元发送第二需求消息,所述第二需求消息包括对所述辅连接执行所述指定操作的第二需求信息,所述第二需求信息包括针对所述辅连接的修改、删除或释放的需求信息。When the target secondary base station detects that the wireless connection status between the target terminal and multiple base stations has changed, the target secondary base station sends a second demand message to the core network element, where the second demand message includes The second demand information for connecting to perform the specified operation, where the second demand information includes demand information for modification, deletion, or release of the auxiliary connection.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 19, further comprising:
    主基站接收来自所述核心网网元的第三指示消息,所述第三指示消息包括与所述第二需求信息对应的主连接命令信息;The primary base station receives a third instruction message from the core network element, where the third instruction message includes primary connection command information corresponding to the second demand information;
    所述主基站向所述核心网网元发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息包括与所述主连接命令信息对应的第二结果信息。The primary base station sends a second response message to the core network element, where the second response message includes second result information corresponding to the primary connection command information.
  21. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站建立请求消息或辅基站添加请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及需要分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 16, wherein the first indication message is a secondary base station establishment request message or a secondary base station addition request message, and the first indication information includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal , And user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  22. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要从所述目标辅基站回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 16, wherein the first indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the first indication information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned from the target secondary base station to the primary base station, or re- User service feature information shunted to the target secondary base station.
  23. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,所述第一指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示信息包括需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 16, wherein the first indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the first indication information includes the remaining user service on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted Characteristic information.
  24. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 17, wherein:
    所述第一需求消息为辅基站建立需求消息或辅基站添加需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The first demand message is a secondary base station establishment demand message or a secondary base station add demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  25. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 17, wherein:
    所述第一需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者重新分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The first demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the first demand message includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station, or user service characteristic information that needs to be redirected to the target secondary base station.
  26. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 17, wherein:
    所述第一需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第一需求消息包括需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The first demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station deletion demand message, and the first demand message includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted.
  27. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站建立命令消息或辅基站添加命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及已分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 18, wherein the second indication message is a secondary base station setup command message or a secondary base station add command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal , And user service characteristic information that has been offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  28. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息,或者所述你第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及已分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 18, wherein the second instruction message is a secondary base station modification command message, and the second instruction message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the need to return to the primary The user service characteristic information of the base station, or the your second indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the user service characteristic information that has been offloaded to the target secondary base station.
  29. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其中,所述第二指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第二指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The method according to claim 18, wherein the second indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the second indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal , And the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be returned to the primary base station.
  30. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 20, wherein:
    所述第二需求消息为辅基站修改需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息;The second demand message is a secondary base station modification demand message, and the second demand information includes user service characteristic information that needs to be returned to the primary base station;
    所述第三指示消息为辅基站修改请求消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息;The third indication message is a secondary base station modification request message, and the third indication message includes available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service feature information that needs to be returned to the primary base station;
    所述第一指示信息为辅基站修改命令消息,所述第一指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息,以及已回流到主基站的用户业务特征信息。The first indication information is a secondary base station modification command message, and the first indication message includes available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and user service characteristic information that has been returned to the primary base station.
  31. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 20, wherein:
    所述第二需求消息为辅基站释放需求消息或辅基站删除需求消息,所述第二需求信息包括需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;The second demand message is a secondary base station release demand message or a secondary base station delete demand message, and the second demand information includes remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted;
    所述第三指示消息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第三指示消息包括所述目标终端中的可用主连接能力和资源信息,以及需要回流到主基站的目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息;The third indication message is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the third indication message includes the available primary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal, and the target secondary base station that needs to return to the primary base station The remaining user service feature information on the Internet;
    所述第一指示信息为辅基站释放命令消息或辅基站删除命令消息,所述第一指示消息中需要删除的所述目标辅基站上剩余的用户业务特征信息。The first indication information is a secondary base station release command message or a secondary base station delete command message, and the remaining user service feature information on the target secondary base station that needs to be deleted in the first indication message.
  32. 根据权利要求21、24或27所述的方法,其中,所述目标辅基站对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作,包括:The method according to claim 21, 24 or 27, wherein the target secondary base station performing the designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal comprises:
    所述目标辅基站根据所述目标终端中的可用辅连接能力和资源信息以及需要分流到所述目标辅基站的用户业务特征信息,建立所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端的辅连接,以将所述用户业务分流到所述目标辅基站,使所述目标辅基站继续承载传输。The target secondary base station establishes the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal according to the available secondary connection capability and resource information in the target terminal and the user service characteristic information that needs to be offloaded to the target secondary base station, so as to The user service is offloaded to the target secondary base station, so that the target secondary base station continues to carry and transmit.
  33. 根据权利要求22、25、28或30所述的方法,其中,所述目标辅基站对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作,包括:The method according to claim 22, 25, 28 or 30, wherein the target secondary base station performing the designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal comprises:
    所述目标辅基站将需要回流的用户业务承载传输资源从所述目标辅基站删除,或为重新分流的用户业务分配新承载传输资源。The target secondary base station deletes the user service bearer transmission resources that need to be returned from the target secondary base station, or allocates new bearer transmission resources for the re-offloaded user services.
  34. 根据权利要求23、26、29或31所述的方法,其中,所述目标辅基站对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作,包括:The method according to claim 23, 26, 29 or 31, wherein the target secondary base station performing the designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal comprises:
    所述目标辅基站将剩余的用户业务承载传输资源从所述目标辅基站删除,并释放或删除所述目标辅基站。The target secondary base station deletes the remaining user service bearer transmission resources from the target secondary base station, and releases or deletes the target secondary base station.
  35. 一种连接装置,包括:A connecting device includes:
    发送模块,设置为向目标辅基站发送第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息包括对所述目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改或删除;A sending module, configured to send a first instruction message to the target secondary base station, the first instruction message including first instruction information for performing a designated operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, the designated operation including Create, add, modify or delete;
    接收模块,设置为收来自所述目标辅基站的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息包括与所述第一指示信息对应的第一结果信息。The receiving module is configured to receive a first response message from the target secondary base station, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication information.
  36. 一种连接装置,包括:A connecting device includes:
    接收模块,设置为接收来自核心网网元的第一指示消息,所述第一指示消息包括对目标辅基站与目标终端之间的辅连接执行指定操作的第一指示信息,所述指定操作包括建立、添加、修改或删除;The receiving module is configured to receive a first instruction message from a core network element, where the first instruction message includes first instruction information for performing a specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal, and the specified operation includes Create, add, modify or delete;
    执行模块,设置为对所述目标辅基站与所述目标终端之间的辅连接执行所述指定操作;An execution module, configured to execute the specified operation on the secondary connection between the target secondary base station and the target terminal;
    发送模块,设置为向所述核心网网元发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息包括与所述第一指示消息对应的第一结果信息。The sending module is configured to send a first response message to the core network element, where the first response message includes first result information corresponding to the first indication message.
  37. 一种网络设备,包括:处理器及存储器;A network device, including: a processor and a memory;
    所述存储器被配置为存储指令;The memory is configured to store instructions;
    所述处理器被配置为读取所述指令以执行如权利要求1至34中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to read the instructions to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 34.
  38. 一种存储介质,存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现权利要求1至34任一项所述的方法。A storage medium storing a computer program, which implements the method of any one of claims 1 to 34 when the computer program is executed by a processor.
PCT/CN2020/082888 2019-04-03 2020-04-02 Connecting method and apparatus, network device, and storage medium WO2020200261A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910267440.6A CN110536477B (en) 2019-04-03 2019-04-03 Connection method, device, network equipment and storage medium
CN201910267440.6 2019-04-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020200261A1 true WO2020200261A1 (en) 2020-10-08

Family

ID=68659356

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/082888 WO2020200261A1 (en) 2019-04-03 2020-04-02 Connecting method and apparatus, network device, and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110536477B (en)
WO (1) WO2020200261A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114567362A (en) * 2020-11-27 2022-05-31 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Method for information interaction between satellites and satellite

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110536477B (en) * 2019-04-03 2023-11-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Connection method, device, network equipment and storage medium
WO2021147004A1 (en) * 2020-01-22 2021-07-29 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Cell search method, and terminal
CN113365315B (en) * 2020-03-03 2023-06-06 华为技术有限公司 Gateway station switching method and device
CN113692068B (en) * 2020-05-19 2023-09-22 成都鼎桥通信技术有限公司 Terminal signal measurement method and system
CN113747420B (en) * 2020-05-29 2023-02-03 中国电信股份有限公司 Data transmission method, network equipment and system in multi-connection network
CN112583736A (en) * 2020-12-11 2021-03-30 北京锐安科技有限公司 Signaling message distribution method, device, equipment and medium
CN116582875B (en) * 2023-07-07 2023-10-03 中国电信股份有限公司 Dual-connection establishment method, apparatus, electronic device and storage medium

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104349300A (en) * 2013-08-08 2015-02-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Dual connectivity processing method, device and core network element
US20150215840A1 (en) * 2014-01-30 2015-07-30 Intel IP Corporation Systems, methods and devices for application specific routing in dual connectivity
CN108617025A (en) * 2016-12-30 2018-10-02 华为技术有限公司 A kind of dual link method and access network equipment
CN108617020A (en) * 2016-12-30 2018-10-02 中国电信股份有限公司 A kind of method and system for establishing control plane connection
CN110536477A (en) * 2019-04-03 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Connection method, device, the network equipment and storage medium

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104349300A (en) * 2013-08-08 2015-02-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Dual connectivity processing method, device and core network element
US20150215840A1 (en) * 2014-01-30 2015-07-30 Intel IP Corporation Systems, methods and devices for application specific routing in dual connectivity
CN108617025A (en) * 2016-12-30 2018-10-02 华为技术有限公司 A kind of dual link method and access network equipment
CN108617020A (en) * 2016-12-30 2018-10-02 中国电信股份有限公司 A kind of method and system for establishing control plane connection
CN110536477A (en) * 2019-04-03 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Connection method, device, the network equipment and storage medium

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LG ELECTRONICS INC.: "Discussion on SeNB addition and modification", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG3 MEETING #83BIS R3-140703, 4 April 2014 (2014-04-04), XP050795394, DOI: 20200603093449A *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114567362A (en) * 2020-11-27 2022-05-31 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Method for information interaction between satellites and satellite

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110536477A (en) 2019-12-03
CN110536477B (en) 2023-11-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020200261A1 (en) Connecting method and apparatus, network device, and storage medium
KR102627400B1 (en) System and method for IAB handovers
CN108990116B (en) Management method, device and equipment for mobile switching
EP4132091A1 (en) Cell management method and apparatus, device and storage medium
US11647426B2 (en) Method and apparatus for processing IAB node information in IAB network
EP3598838B1 (en) Data transmission methods, data transmission apparatuses and non-transitory computer readable medium
WO2020199890A1 (en) Session processing method and apparatus, network device and storage medium
WO2017054538A1 (en) Method for establishing auxiliary signaling link, and device, base station and terminal therefor
CN110536482B (en) Method and related equipment for managing link connection between nodes
JP6567686B2 (en) Method and apparatus for establishing a path for data offload
US20180270809A1 (en) Operation method of communication node in millimeter wave based communication system
JP7398456B2 (en) Establishing and establishing links and electronic devices
CN114365542A (en) Anchor point mobility in a hybrid cellular network
JP7099556B2 (en) How to secure a wireless backhaul, a child base station, a parent base station, and a method in a child base station and a parent base station
EP3202212B1 (en) Local breakout in small cell architecture
US10798557B2 (en) Space-based long term evolution (LTE) communications architecture
KR20240004972A (en) A first node, a second node, and a method executed by the same for processing migration of a node
WO2022205326A1 (en) Integrated access and backhaul donor migration methods and systems
RU2777403C1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining and establishing a connection, transmission system, and satellite communication system
WO2022082690A1 (en) Group switching method, apparatus and system
KR20200043931A (en) Path switching method and base station
EP4340444A1 (en) Method for sending and receiving signal, apparatus for sending and receiving signal, and communication system
JP2024502450A (en) Group migration method, equipment and system
JP2024511813A (en) Signal transmission and reception methods, devices and communication systems
KR20230055389A (en) Method and apparatus for communicating in a base station using a plurality of transmission and receiption points

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20782384

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 03/03/2022)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20782384

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1